Remove PDF

GE Healthcare
CARESCAPE Monitor B650

Service Manual
Software Version 2
Hardware Version B650 VER02
All specifications subject to change without notice.
English
2nd edition
2106778-002 paper
31 May 2018
© 2018 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.

The information in this manual applies to the software and hardware versions listed on the first page of this manual. Due to
continuing product innovation, specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice.

Table of contents
Table of contents
1 About this manual 1

1.1 Intended use of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Intended audience of the manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Conventions used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3.1 Product naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Illustrations and names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Ordering manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.7 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.7.1 Third party trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.8 Responsibility of the manufacturer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.9 Product availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Safety information 5
2.1 General safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Safety message signal words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3 System introduction 9
3.1 Short description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.1 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.3 Input devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.4 Acquisition modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2.5 CARESCAPE Network MC or S/5 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2.6 CARESCAPE Network IX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.7 Unity Network ID connectivity device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.8 Secondary display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.9 Printers and recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.10 Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3 Controls and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3.1 Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3.2 Side views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.3 Rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4 IEC 60601-1 classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5 Service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.1 Service requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.2 Equipment identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.6 Product security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6.1 Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6.2 Security operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.3 Product change management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.6.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
i
2106778-002
CARESPACE Monitors B650
3.7 Equipment symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.8 User interface symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4 Using Webmin service interface 39

4.1 Local access to Webmin using the integrated browser on the patient monitor . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.2 Local access to Webmin with a service PC connected to the IX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.3 Local access to Webmin with a service PC connected to the MC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.4 Remote access to Webmin using a service PC over the IX Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.5 Login to Webmin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.6 Webmin configuration modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.7 Webmin information modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.8 Webmin diagnostics modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5 Pre-installation requirements 51
5.1 Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.2 Compatibility check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.3 Network infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.1 MC Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.2 Wireless MC Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.3 S/5 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.4 S/5 Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.3.5 IX Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.4 Installing the mounting hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.5 Unity Network ID connectivity device installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.6 Power and environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6 Hardware installation 57
6.1 Installing a battery into the patient monitor and the PDM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.1.1 Testing the battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.1.2 Installing the battery into the patient monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.1.3 Installing the battery into the PDM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.2 Mounting the patient monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.3 Connecting a secondary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.3.1 Connections to D15K and D19KT displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.4 Installing parameter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.4.1 Installing a PSM or a PDM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.5 Connecting to the mains power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.6 Connecting to the MC Network or the S/5 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.7 Connecting to the IX Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.8 Connecting to a Unity Network ID connectivity device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.9 Connecting USB devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.10 Connecting iCollect and other data acquisition systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.11 Connecting a remote-on cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.12 Connecting a local printer to the IX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7 Configuration 69
7.1 Adjusting display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.1.1 Adjusting the brightness of the integrated primary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.1.2 Calibrating a touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.1.3 Adjusting optional secondary display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ii
2106778-002
Table of contents
7.2 Configuring the network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

7.2.1 Configuring hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.2.2 Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.2.3 Selecting and configuring S/5 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.2.4 Configuring WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.2.5 Configuring ADT server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.3 Setting time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.4 Setting unit and bed name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.5 Configuring printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.5.1 Installing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.5.2 Deleting a printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.5.3 Printing a test page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.6 Configuring MUSE/12SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.7 Admit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.7.1 Patient ID prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.7.2 Barcode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.7.3 Configuring length delimited parser information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.7.4 Configure character delimited parser information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.7.5 Barcode data specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.8 Setting power frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.9 Selecting language and locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.10 Selecting national requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.11 Configuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.11.1 Module asset settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.12 Setting the host asset number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.13 Password management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.13.1 User accounts and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.13.2 Changing passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.13.3 Resetting the password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.14 Restarting the patient monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.15 Setting up the remote service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.15.1 Configuring the remote service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.15.2 Enabling remote service agent/ connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.16 Transferring settings from one patient monitor to other patient monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.16.1 Saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.16.2 Loading settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.16.3 Activating settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.16.4 Canceling pending settings activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.17 License management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.17.1 Enabling and activating host software package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.17.2 Enabling and activating host software feature licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.17.3 Uploading license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.18 Certificate management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.18.1 Generating a certificate and a private key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.18.2 Generating a certificate signing request (CSR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.18.3 Importing the certificate and the private key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.18.4 Managing the current certificate or private key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
7.18.5 Managing the Webmin certificate or key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
7.19 Software management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
iii
2106778-002
7.19.1 Transferring the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

7.19.2 Activating the installed software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.19.3 Canceling pending host software activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
7.19.4 Erasing an inactive software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8 Installation checkout 107

8.1 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.2 Electrical safety tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.2.1 Test setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.2.2 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.2.3 Power cord and plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.2.4 Ground integrity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.2.5 Ground leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.2.6 Testing touch current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.2.7 Patient leakage current tests – overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.2.8 Patient (source) leakage current tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.2.9 Patient (sink) leakage current tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.2.10 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.3 Functional check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.3.1 Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.3.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.3.3 Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.3.4 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.3.5 Trim knob, secondary display, and remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.3.6 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.3.7 Alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.3.8 Barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.3.9 MC Network and S/5 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.3.10 Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.3.11 IX printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.3.12 InSite RSvP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.3.13 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9 Theory of operation 123

9.1 Main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.1.1 Power management subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.1.2 CPU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.1.3 Display subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.1.4 User interface subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.1.5 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.1.6 Pivoting module frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10 Maintenance and checkout 135

10.2 Electrical safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.3 Functional check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.3.1 Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.3.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.3.3 PSM / PDM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.3.4 E-module identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
iv
2106778-002
Table of contents
10.3.5 Keypad and remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

10.3.6 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.7 Alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.8 Barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.9 MC Network and S/5 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.10 Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.11 IX printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.12InSite RSvP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.13Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.14Synchronization connector test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.3.15Test completion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.4 Monitor battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.4.1 Use recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.2 Storage recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.3 Testing the battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.4 Charging a battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.5 Conditioning a battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.6 Replacing a battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.4.7 Battery recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11 Troubleshooting 145
11.2 Webmin - Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.2.1 Configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
11.2.2 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.3 Webmin - Diagnostics tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.3.1 Hardware statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.3.2 Ping a TCP/IP network device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
11.3.3 WLAN diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
11.3.4 Log files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
11.4 Power management LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
11.5 Network status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.6 Battery diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.7 Error messages and codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
11.8 Problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
11.8.1 Start-up failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
11.8.2 User interface issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
11.8.3 Incorrect system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
11.8.4 License issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
11.8.5 Recorder issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
11.8.6 Acquisition module problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
11.8.7 CARESCAPE Network communication issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11.8.8 S/5 Network communication issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
12 Disassembly and reassembly 183

12.1 Disassembly guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.1.1 ESD precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.1.2 Reassembly precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.1.3 Required tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
v
2106778-002
12.1.4 Before disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

12.2 Module frame disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12.2.1 Detaching the module frame front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12.2.2 Detaching the Recorder Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.2.3 Detaching the PDM docking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.2.4 Detaching the Module Frame cover unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12.2.5 Detaching the E-module Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12.2.6 Detaching the Module Frame assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12.3 Main unit disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12.3.1 Replacing the mains fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12.3.2 Detaching the Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12.3.3 Detaching the Frame Side Housing Decorations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.3.4 Detaching the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.3.5 Disassembling the main unit into Rear and Front units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.3.6 Detaching the uDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.3.7 Replacing the CPU timekeeper battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.3.8 Detaching the DC/DC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.3.9 Detaching the CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.3.10Detaching the AC/DC board and rear unit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.3.11Replacing the rear unit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.3.12Detaching the Base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.4 Front Unit Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12.4.1 Detaching the Front Unit Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12.4.2 Detaching the LCD Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12.4.3 Replacing the Trim Knob and Trim Knob Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.4.4 Replacing the Front Unit Assembly FRU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.4.5 Replacing the WLAN Assembly FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13 Service parts 219

13.1 Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
13.2 List of FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Appendix A: Installation check form A-1

Appendix B: Maintenance check form B-1
Appendix C: Verification procedure for wireless MC Network infrastructure C-1
vi
2106778-002
About this manual
1 About this manual

1.1 Intended use of the manual
This manual contains instructions necessary to install, maintain and service the device to the
assembly level. Use it as a guide for installation, maintenance and repairs considered field
repairable. The list below indicates the products (brands, models and descriptions as
applicable) with which this manual is to be used:
 CARESCAPE Monitor B650 B1
 CARESCAPE Monitor B650-LI B1
 CARESCAPE Monitor B650-RM B1
Chapters 1 to 7 provide an overview of the CARESCAPE Monitor B650 patient monitoring

system and contains information needed for system installation.
Chapters 8 to 13 provide information for the planned and corrective maintenance of the
CARESCAPE Monitor B650 main unit.
Where necessary the manual identifies additional sources of relevant information and
technical assistance.
See the Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for the planned and corrective
maintenance information about the parameter modules.
See the supplemental information manual for the technical specifications, default settings and
compatibility information, including electromagnetic compatibility.
See the user’s manual for the instructions necessary to operate the device safely in
accordance with its function and intended use.
1.2 Intended audience of the manual

This manual is intended for service representatives and technical personnel who install,
maintain, troubleshoot, or repair this device.
1.3 Conventions used in this manual

Within this manual, special styles and formats are used to distinguish between terms viewed
on screen, a button you must press, or a list of menu commands you must select:
• For technical documentation purposes, the abbreviation GE is used for the legal entity
names, GE Medical Systems Information Technologies Inc. and GE Healthcare Finland Oy.
• Names of hardware keys on the equipment, keypad, remote control, and modules are
written in bold typeface: Start Cancel.
• Menu items are written in bold italic typeface: Monitor Setup.
• Emphasized text is in italic typeface.
• Menu options or control settings selected consecutively are separated by the > symbol:
Procedures > Cardiac Output.
• The word “select” means choosing and confirming.
• Messages (alarm messages, informative messages) displayed on the screen are written in
bold italic typeface: Learning.
• Note statements provide application tips or other useful information.
2106778-002
1.3.1 Product naming conventions

In this manual, the CARESCAPE Monitor B650 is referred to as the patient monitor.
The following naming conventions are used to refer to different modules and module
categories:
 PDM: Patient Data Module
 PSM: Patient Side Module: E-PSMP.
 Cardiac output and SvO2 E-modules: E-COP and E-COPSv.
 Pressure and Temperature E-modules: E-PP and E-PT.
 Continuous Cardiac Output Module: E-PiCCO.
 CARESCAPE respiratory modules: E-sCO, E-sCOV, E-sCOVX, E-sCAiO, E-sCAiOV, and E-
sCAiOVX.
 Single-width airway module: E-miniC
 E-LoFlo module: E-LoFlo
 Specialty E-modules: E-NMT, E-EEG, E-BIS and E-ENTROPY
 SpO2 E-modules: E-NSATX, E-MASIMO
The CARESCAPE Network MC is referred as MC network and the CARESCAPE Network IX as
IX network.
Menu naming varies within software packages:

 Admit/ Discharge is also used in this manual for Start/End case menu (in OR and PACU
software).
1.4 Illustrations and names

This manual uses illustrations as examples only. Illustrations in this manual may not
necessarily reflect all system settings, features, configurations, or displayed data.
Names of persons, institutions, and places and related information are fictitious; any similarity
to actual persons, entities, or places is purely coincidental.
1.5 Ordering manuals

A paper copy of this manual will be provided upon request. Contact your local GE
representative and request the part number on the first page of the manual.
1.6 Related documents

 CARESCAPE Monitor B850, B650, B450 User’s Manual
 CARESCAPE Monitor B850, B650, B450 Supplemental Information Manual
 Module Frames and Modules Service Manual
 CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Software Installation Instructions
 CARESCAPE Network Configuration Guide
 CARESCAPE Wireless Network Configuration Guide
 CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Mounting Solutions
 Unity Network Interface Device (ID) Operator's Manual
 iCentral and iCentral Client Technical Reference Manual
 S/5 Network Installation Guide
2106778-002
About this manual
 iCollect user’s manual

 User documentation for displays
NOTE: The referred documents above are subject to change without notice. Please contact
your local sales or service representative for possible updates.
1.7 Trademarks
Listed below are GE Medical Systems Information Technologies, Inc. and GE Healthcare Finland
Oy trademarks. All other product and company names contained herein are the property of
their respective owners.
GE, GE Monogram, and CARESCAPE are trademarks of General Electric Company.
MUSE, Trim Knob, and UNITY NETWORK are trademarks of GE Medical Systems, Information
Technologies, Inc.
Entropy is a trademark of GE Healthcare Finland Oy.
1.7.1 Third party trademarks

Masimo SET is a trademark of Masimo Corporation.
PiCCO is a trademark of Pulsion Medical Systems.
WMM, WPA and WPA2 are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
1.8 Responsibility of the manufacturer

GE is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability, and performance of the equipment only if:
• Assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, servicing, or repairs are
carried out by authorized service personnel.
• The electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the requirements of the
appropriate regulations.
• The equipment is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
• The equipment is installed, maintained and serviced in accordance with the instructions
provided in the related service manuals.
1.9 Product availability

Some of the products mentioned in this manual may not be available in all countries. Please
consult your local representative for the availability.
2106778-002
For your notes:
2106778-002
Safety information
2 Safety information
2.1 General safety statements
See the user’s manual for a list of general safety statements.
This device is intended for use under the direct supervision of a licensed health care
practitioner.
Contact GE for information before connecting any devices to the equipment that are not
recommended in this manual.
Parts and accessories used must meet the requirements of the applicable IEC 60601 series
safety standards, and/or the system configuration must meet the requirements of the IEC
60601-1 medical electrical systems standard. Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental
information manual for compatible parts and accessories.
Periodically, and whenever the integrity of the product is in doubt, test all functions.
The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating
to the choice shall include:
• use of the accessory in the patient vicinity; and
• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed in accordance
to the appropriate IEC 60601-1 harmonized national standard.
2.2 Safety message signal words

Safety message signal words designate the severity of a potential hazard.
Danger Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
Warning Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
Caution Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Notice Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury that, if
not avoided, could result in property damage.
2106778-002
2.3 Safety symbols

NOTE: The following safety-related symbols appear on one or more of the devices.
General warning sign. ISO 7010.

This symbol is identified by a yellow background, black triangular band, and
a black symbol.
In this manual this symbol is used only in connection with those warning
statements that the labels on the equipment refer to.
Caution. ISO 7000.
This symbol is identified by a white background, black triangular band, and
a black symbol.
Follow instructions for use. ISO 7010.

This symbol is identified by a blue background and a white symbol.
Consult operating instructions. / Operating instructions.
DANGER - Shock hazard. Dangerous voltage. To reduce the risk of electric

shock, do not remove cover. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
ISO 7010.
This symbol is identified by a yellow background, black triangular band, and
a black symbol.
Electrostatic sensitive device. Connections should not be made to this
device unless ESD precautionary procedures are followed.
Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation. Interference may occur in the

vicinity of this device.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated (floating)

applied part suitable for intentional external and internal application to the
patient, excluding direct cardiac application.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

Isolated (floating) applied part suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient excluding direct cardiac application.
2106778-002
Safety information
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated (floating)

applied part suitable for intentional external and internal application to the
patient, including direct cardiac application.
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

Isolated (floating) applied part suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient including direct cardiac application.
Safety ground. Remove power cord from the mains source by grasping the
plug. Do not pull on the cable.
2106778-002
For your notes:
2106778-002
System introduction
3 System introduction
3.1 Short description of the equipment
The CARESCAPE Monitor B650 is a modular multi-parameter patient monitor that is meant for
high-acuity applications.
The monitor can be used with most patient populations within a professional healthcare
facility, but acquisition modules may have limitations for use based on the patient’s age,
weight, or clinical condition, or on the type of the care unit (for example, OR or ICU only). There
are several types of acquisition modules to choose from based on care requirements and
patient needs.
The modular system design is inherent in electronics and algorithms: some processing of the
measurement signals is done by the acquisition modules and further processing happens on
the monitor.
Measurement values are displayed as graphic or numeric values, like waveforms and numbers,
and when applicable, also as alarm messages.
The monitor has a 15-inch display with an alarm light and it supports one slave screen. Screen
contents is user-configurable.
The user interface can be used as a touchscreen, or with a Trim Knob or a mouse and a
keyboard. The most important and commonly used functions have main keys either on the
main menu (soft keys) or on the monitor front panel (hard keys). The menu structure design
allows access to all functions needed by the clinical user with just a few clicks.
The monitor transfers the measurement data to central stations and to the hospital patient
data depositories. It communicates with a variety of other bedside medical devices and
monitoring systems, and it can also use a wireless network for interfacing.
For all physical and performance specifications, refer to the supplemental information
provided.
3.2 System components

The CARESCAPE Monitor B650 monitoring system components are introduced below.
3.2.1 Monitor
The CARESCAPE Monitor B650 consists of a main unit and a pivoting module frame.
Main unit
The main unit consists of the following subsystems: power management, CPU, display, user
interface and external interfaces.
The power management subsystem provides the operating voltages for the electronics of the
device and takes care of the battery management. It consists of an AC/DC power supply, a
DC/DC power management board and an optional lithium-ion battery.
The CPU board is the main board of the monitor. It takes care of the user input and acquisition
data processing and displays the processed information on the screen. It controls the monitor
operation and communication with the other subsystems. It also interfaces with
synchronization connector, the optional WLAN card and the speaker. The main software and
all platform and clinical settings are stored in a detachable flash memory.
The display subsystem consists of a 15” touchscreen LCD display that has an integrated LED
backlight unit. The display controller is integrated to the CPU board.
2106778-002
The user interface board provides an interface between the CPU board , Trim Knob control,
alarm light board and touchscreen sensor.
There are two different configurations of the interface board. They provide connectors for
peripheral devices like USB input devices, network interfaces, a secondary clone display and
other devices.
Module frame
The monitor has a pivoting module frame that includes standard docking for the following
multiparameter hemodynamic modules: Patient Data Module (PDM) and Patient Side Module
(PSM).
The E-module support extends the monitoring capabilities to other hemodynamic modules,
gas measurement, brain monitoring, and relaxation measurement. The optional integrated
recorder enables local printing to a thermal paper. The recorder option is also available as a
field upgrade.
3.2.2 Software
The patient monitor is highly configurable and provides many monitoring possibilities with a
flexible software licensing model.
The monitor supports care area specific software packages for OR, PACU, ICU, ED and NICU.
Each dedicated software package provides a comprehensive feature set for the different
monitoring needs and can be further extended with the optional feature licenses.
Software license model supports trial licensing and easy field upgrades with license key
activation.
3.2.3 Input devices

You can connect several USB input devices to the patient monitor, including alphanumeric
keyboard, mouse, remote control and barcode reader.
Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for a list of compatible USB
input devices.
10
2106778-002
System introduction
Keyboard
A washable, antibacterial keyboard is specified for
use with the monitor. It may be connected to the
monitor or display via one of the USB connectors.
The keyboard allows you to enter data without
using the touchscreen display.
Mouse
A standard mouse may be connected to the
monitor or display via one of the USB connectors.
The mouse allows you to select any on-screen
items without a Trim Knob control or a touchscreen
display.
Remote control
The remote control provides all patient monitor
controls on a portable component with a Trim Knob
control. The remote control is connected to the
patient monitor via one of the USB connectors.
Barcode reader
The barcode reader can be used to scan a
Technician ID and Patient Information from
barcodes when admitting patients.
11
2106778-002
3.2.4 Acquisition modules

The patient monitor includes standard docking for the following multiparameter hemodynamic
modules: PSMP and PDM.
E-PSMP PDM
The integrated E-module slots can occupy two single-width or one double-width E-modules at
a time.
Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for a list of compatible
acquisition devices and to the patient monitor’s user’s manual for a list of parameters each
module measures.
3.2.5 CARESCAPE Network MC or S/5 Network

The patient monitor is compatible both with the CARESCAPE Network MC and the S/5 Network
infrastructures. The optional WLAN support enables wireless network communication using
IEEE 802.11a/b/g.
CARESCAPE and S/5 Network devices.
12
2106778-002
System introduction
The MC Network establishes communication and allows patient data to be sent to an optional
CARESCAPE Central Station.
The S/5 Network establishes communication and allows patient data to be sent to an iCentral
(central station).
3.2.6 CARESCAPE Network IX

The patient monitor may be connected to the CARESCAPE Network IX.
The IX Network provides you access for example to the MUSE server for MUSE/12SL reports
and to the IX printers. It also enables centralized Webmin access for service personnel from
within the hospital and the InSite RSvP remote service connectivity to GE’s support center.
Refer to the CARESCAPE Network Configuration Guide for details on configuring the
CARESCAPE Network.
13
2106778-002
3.2.7 Unity Network ID connectivity device
The Unity Network ID connectivity device acquires digital data from up to eight peripheral
bedside devices (not necessarily manufactured by GE), processes this data and transmits the
formatted data to the patient monitor.
The supported interfaces include anesthesia machines, ventilators, gas analyzers, continuous
cardiac output devices, pulse oximeters, transcutaneous monitors and point-of-care blood gas
monitors.
Refer to the Unity Network Interface Device (ID) Operator's Manual and the patient monitor’s
supplemental information manual for a list of compatible peripheral devices and to the patient
monitor’s user’s manual for the peripheral device parameter data displayed on the patient
monitor.
3.2.8 Secondary display

The patient monitor supports a secondary, clone display that is capable of displaying the same
image as the integrated primary display.
The secondary display is 19” touchscreen LCD with an abbreviated keypad and a Trim Knob
control. The secondary display shows visual alarms and provides connectivity to the USB input
devices.
displays.
14
2106778-002
System introduction
3.2.9 Printers and recorders

The patient monitor can print to a recorder and to a laser printer.
recorders and laser printers.
Laser printers
A laser printer can print for example waveforms, graphic and numeric trends, snapshots,
events history, parameter specific printouts, stored laboratory data and calculation results and
care reports. Refer to the patient monitor’s user’s manual for more information about printing.
The patient monitor supports printing:
• to a laser printer that is connected to the patient monitor via the IX Network or directly to
the IX connector in the patient monitor.
• to a laser printer that is connected to a CARESCAPE Central Station on the MC Network.
• to a laser printer that is connected to an iCentral on the S/5 Network.
Recorders
A recorder may print text, waveforms and numeric trends.
The patient monitor supports printing:
• to an integrated, local recorder (optional).
• to a PRN 50M recorder connected to another patient monitor or to a CARESCAPE Central
Station on the MC Network.
15
2106778-002
3.2.10 Service Interface

Webmin is a browser-based interface that provides service and diagnostic functions for the
patient monitor. Using a web browser, the user can connect to Webmin to configure, diagnose
and retrieve system information. The user can access Webmin either locally on the patient
monitor or remotely over the IX Network.
Local access to Webmin

The user can access Webmin locally using the integrated browser on the patient monitor.
The other way to access Webmin locally is from a configured service PC that is connected to
the patient monitor with an Ethernet crossover cable.
Remote access to Webmin

The user also can access Webmin remotely using a configured service PC over the IX Network.
InSite RSvP
InSite RSvP provides a set of software applications to manage, diagnose and track systems at
customer sites by using the Internet for secure communications between the customers’ and
GE’s firewalls. InSite RSvP consists of Enterprise Server, which resides at GE’s support center,
and Remote Service Agent that resides on a system at the customer site (or on a PC controlling
the system(s) at the customer site).
16
2106778-002
System introduction
3.3 Controls and connectors

3.3.1 Front view
2 3 4
B650 with touch screen
5 6 7 8 9 10
Alarm light Power indicators
(1) Alarm light

(2) Power on/standby button
(3) Battery power/ mains power indicators
17
2106778-002
(4) Trim Knob control

(5) Ambient light detector lens
(6) Audio alarm paused/off area (blue)
(7) Alarm light area (blue, yellow, or red)
(8) Mains voltage indicator - the green LED is lit when the monitor is connected to AC mains.
(9) Battery use indicator - the green LED is lit when the monitor is operating on battery
power.
(10) Battery charging/failure indicator - the orange LED is lit when the monitor battery is
charging and flashing in case of battery failure or missing battery.
3.3.2 Side views
1 2 3 4
(1) Battery cover lock*

(2) Battery cover*
(3) Module slot for one double-width or two single-width modules
(4) Defibrillator (ECG) and IABP synchronization (E-modules only)
(5) Release switch for the pivoting module frame
(6) Recorder*
*) optional
NOTE: The Defibrillation synchronization connector can be used only with E-(P)RE(S)TN and
E-PSMP modules. PDM module has its own defibrillation synchronization connector.
18
2106778-002
System introduction
3.3.3 Rear views
3 4 5 6 7 8
(1) Power LEDs for troubleshooting

(2) Cable clamp for power cord
(3) Equipotential connector
(4) Receptacle for power cord and fuse holder
(5) Device label
(6) Slide mount with connector for PDM
(7) Slide mount with connector for PSMP
19
2106778-002
Interface board connectors
Advanced Interface Board
MCID NA IX
ePort X3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MC
Standard Interface Board
(1) USB ports (2 or 4 pcs USB 2.0 Type A connectors)

(2) DVI-I connector for a secondary display
(3) ePort connector for PDM
(4) Network connector for the MC Network & S/5 Network
(5) Network connector for the Unity Network Interface Device (ID) connectivity device
(6) Not in use
(7) Network connector for the IX Network
(8) Remote-on connector
3.4 IEC 60601-1 classifications

• Type of protection against electric shock: Class I.
• Monitors with battery option: Without mains connection: internally powered medical
equipment.
• Degree of protection against electrical shock: applied parts are marked with a symbol
indicating degree of protection.
• Degree of safety of application in the presence of flammable anesthetic mixture with air
or with oxygen or nitrous oxide: Not suitable.
WARNING EXPLOSION. Do not use this equipment in the presence of flammable
anesthetics, vapors or liquids.
• Mode of operation: Continuous.
20
2106778-002
System introduction
• Method(s) of sterilization or disinfection recommended by the manufacturer: see the

user’s manual.
IEC 60601-1-2
The system complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2007-03.
In accordance with IEC 60601-1-2, modules marked with the ESD warning symbol (IEC
60417-5134) require user training in ESD awareness and prevention as follows:
• The contents of the training are specified in the local ESD Control Program Plan, issued in
accordance with IEC 61340-5-1. The training should at least include an introduction to
ESD and its impacts on electrical devices and how to prevent it by using appropriate
personal protection equipment, proper work practices and tools.
According to parameter-specific IEC 60601–2–x series standard requirements for ESU
(electrosurgical unit) tests, the equipment is protected against malfunction caused by
electrosurgery.
IEC 60529
• Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: IPX1.
3.5 Service information

3.5.1 Service requirements
Follow the service requirements listed below.
• Refer servicing of the equipment to qualified service personnel only. Service personnel
servicing this product must have an appropriate technical qualification, or equivalent
work experience, and be familiar with the service requirements described in this manual
and in any related service documentation. Service training for the product is
recommended.
• Any unauthorized attempt to repair equipment under warranty voids that warranty.
• It is the user's responsibility to report the need for service to GE or to one of their
authorized agents.
• Failure on the part of the responsible individual, hospital, or institution using this
equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue
equipment failure and possible health hazards.
• Regular maintenance, irrespective of usage, is essential to ensure that the equipment will
always be functional when required.
CAUTION DISPOSAL - At the end of its service life, the product described in this manual,
as well as its accessories, must be disposed of in compliance with the
guidelines regulating the disposal of each product. If you have any questions
concerning disposal of a product, please contact GE or its representatives.
3.5.2 Equipment identification

Unique Device Identifier (UDI)
Every medical device has a unique marking for identification. The UDI marking appears either
on the device labeling or for upgraded monitors on the Login to Webmin dialog box.
21
2106778-002
The characters used in the UDI marking represent specific identifiers. In the example above:
Device identifier:
• (01) = GS1 global trade item number (GTIN) of the device.
• 1234567891234 = Global trade item number.
Production identifiers:
• (21) = GS1 application identifier for the serial number of the device.
• SK412345678HA = Serial number, where the first three characters represent Product
Code.
• (11) = GS1 application identifier for the manufacturing date of the device.
• 151228 = Manufacturing date: year-month-day (YYMMDD).
Note that for some product types the production identifier can have other elements instead of
the ones listed above:
• (10) = GS1 application identifier for the batch or lot number, followed by the batch or lot
number.
• (17) = GS1 application identifier for the expiration date of the device, followed by the
expiration date.
Device label
Every GE device has a unique serial number for identification. The serial number is written in a
device label. A sample of the information on a device label is shown below.
The product code for CARESCAPE Monitor B650 VER02 is SS6, SK4, or SQC.
22
2106778-002
System introduction
3.6 Product security

The patient monitoring software incorporates an assortment of security features designed to
allow a flexible approach to safe and secure implementation, focusing on the principles of
confidentiality, integrity, and availability. These features assist you in using the system in a
manner that protects patient privacy and security in your setting, and also addresses
expectations for the environment where the system will be used.
3.6.1 Security features

Access control
Access control is the overall mechanism used to determine and enforce the following:
• Who has access
• How individuals gain access
• When access is permitted
• What information may be accessed
Other than clinical and Webmin applications, access to other subsystems (for example BIOS) is
restricted. The clinical and Webmin application interfaces have a role-based access control (for
example, biomed and clinical). A user may log into these interfaces (for example, Webmin) to
perform operations that are limited to the generic user. See the user and service manuals for
detailed information on available features.
Authentication
Authentication is the process of proving individual identity, and is a key element in an access
control system. In the clinical and Webmin applications, there are certain features that require
user authentication. To access these features, the user must log into the clinical and Webmin
applications with a valid username and password.
Authorization
Authorization is the process of granting and revoking access to information, and is another key
element in an access control system. Although primarily an administrative process that is
driven by an organization’s policies and procedures, the patient monitor contains features that
will help implement and enforce an organization’s method.
Both clinical and Webmin applications have an authorization mechanism to provide
information to the user.
Audit
The ability to record and examine system activity is crucial to a successful information security
program, as well as a regulatory requirement in most environments. The patient monitor stores
system and Webmin access logs.
Malicious software protection

Vigilant defense on many levels is required to keep systems free from compromise by
malicious software. Effective protection requires cooperation and partnership between GE and
our customers.
Based on the Linux Operating System, the patient monitor has a built-in firewall to allow
external communication to occur on a limited number of ports on the IX Network.
The following product features contribute to defense against malicious software:
• System integrity checking
23
2106778-002
The patient monitor performs integrity checking on the root file system to detect any
changes to the file system contents. Any modification to the root file system contents will
generate an error to the patient monitoring software application. The patient monitoring
software will then display a technical alarm to the user.
• Device design and configuration (hardening)
The patient monitor has been hardened through the restriction and removal of user
access to core operating system functionality. In addition, unneeded functionality has
been removed or restricted.
• Antivirus software
To provide seamless real-time patient monitoring, the patient monitor does not have
antivirus software.
• Security updates and patching processes
Security updates and patches cannot be applied to the CARESCAPE product without
going through GE’s vigorous software verification and validation process. Any software
update needs will be communicated by GE.
3.6.2 Security operations

Network security
GE requires that the MC port of the patient monitor be connected to a physically or virtually
dedicated CARESCAPE Network MC or S/5 Network, isolated from all other networks.
GE requires that the IX port of the patient monitor be connected to a physically or virtually
dedicated CARESCAPE Network IX with controlled connection to the organization’s general
purpose computing network. Traffic between the organization’s network and IX port of the
patient monitor must be limited to the following packet flows listed below.
Inbound
Source device Destination device Protocol Destination port Use
Any  icmp N/A ping

Customer tcp 10000 Webmin

defined
Patient monitor
Customer tcp 10001 Software
defined transfer
DHCP server tcp 67, 68 DHCP
Packets that are part of the communication initiated by authorized devices in the
organization’s network are allowed to go out of the IX Network (reflexive).
24
2106778-002
System introduction
Outbound
Source device Destination Device Protocol Destination port Use
Any icmp N/A ping
Patient
monitor
us1-ws.service.gehealthcare. tcp 443 InSite RSvP
com (Web Services)
us1-rd.service.gehealthcare. tcp 443 InSite RSvP
com (Remote Tunnel)
Printer tcp 631 Printing
MUSE tcp 80 MUSE
Packets that are part of the communication initiated by the patient monitor are allowed into
the IX Network (reflexive).
Wireless Network Security

The patient monitor can operate both in the wired and the wireless MC Network or S/5
Network. IX Network is wired only.
Refer to the Wireless LAN Network Installation Guide and S/5 Network Installation Guide for
more information regarding the security features of the wireless MC Network and the S/5
Wireless Network, respectively.
Network identification
The Service Set Identifier (SSID), also known as network name, identifies a particular wireless
network. The patient monitors shall be configured to use the same SSID with the access points
to enable wireless communication. It is recommended to configure access points not to
broadcast SSID to the wireless network.
The wireless MC Network shall be logically separated to its own virtual LAN with a dedicated
SSID. The S/5 Wireless Network shall have dedicated access points that are physically isolated
from all other networks.
Security (authentication and confidentiality)
The data transmitted on the wireless network can be secured by one of the following methods:
 WEP (64-bit) (NOTE: S/5 only)
 WEP (128-bit)
 WPA-PSK (TKIP) (NOTE: MC only)
 WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP) (NOTE: MC Only)
3.6.3 Product change management

GE has rigorous software verification and validation processes. Any software update needs will
be communicated by GE. The patient monitoring system, including all aspects of software,
should be used as it was intended by GE.
3.6.4 Communication
For detailed product security information, go to one of the following Web addresses:
25
2106778-002
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/security
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/security/mds2.html
3.7 Equipment symbols
The following symbols appear on one or more of the devices.
Bell cancel. Audio off.
Audio pause. Temporary audio off.
General alarm.
Fuse. Replace with identical type and rating fuse.
Do not reuse.
Battery (monitor): The flashing orange symbol indicates that

there is a battery failure/missing battery.
Battery (monitor): The solid orange symbol indicates that the

battery is being charged.
Battery (monitor). The solid green symbol indicates that the

monitor is being used on battery power.
Battery (monitor). Located on the battery slot cover.
Battery (monitor): The battery slot cover is open/closed.
26
2106778-002
System introduction
Battery (monitor): Test button on the battery to check the battery

charge level.
Battery (PDM).
Communication. (PDM)
Power indicator. (PDM)
(black or red)
On/standby button.
Standby or power indicator.
USB connectors.
Ethernet connectors.
Serial interface.
ePort connector for PDM module and E-module frame.
27
2106778-002
DVI connector. Video output connector for digital or analog

source.
Color video input. Video input connector for digital or analog source.
Color video output, digital. Video output for analog source.
Color video output. Video output for digital source.
Gas inlet.
Gas outlet.
Zero all. (PDM)
Degree of ingress protection.

Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
Components not marked with an IPXn code are rated as
Ordinary (no protection against fluid ingress). All other IPXn rated
components have the degree of protection per the ‘n’ rating.
IPX1: This equipment is protected against harmful effects of
dripping water per IEC 60529.
Latex-free.
Use by.
Add date.
28
2106778-002
System introduction
Home. Return to the main display.
Alternating current.
Green symbol on the B650 and B450 monitor front panel: the
monitor is being used on mains power. Without mains
connection the B650 and B450 are internally powered medical
equipment.
Direct current.
Equipotentiality. Connect device to a potential equalization

conductor.
Protective earth ground. Connectors grounded to the AC power

source.
Defibrillator synchronization connectors.
Stacking limit by number.
29
2106778-002

Date of manufacture. This symbol indicates the date of
manufacture of this device. The first four digits identify the year,
the following two digits identify the month, and the last two
digits identify the day.
Manufacturer date and address. The first four digits identify the
year, the following two digits identify the month, and the last two
digits identify the day.
Manufacturer name and address.
Batch or lot number.
Abbreviation for label part number.
Abbreviation of product number.
Identifies the device type.
Catalogue or orderable part number.
Device serial number.
Device model or type.
Every device has a unique marking for identification. The UDI

marking appears on the device label.
Mass of typical portable RGM (respiratory gas monitor)

configuration.
The indicated mass (12 kg in this example) varies per RGM
configuration.
30
2106778-002
System introduction
Locked.
Unlocked.
No heavy load.
Maximum total load.
Atmospheric pressure limitations.
Temperature limitations.
Humidity limitations.
Keep dry. Protect from rain.
31
2106778-002
Fragile. Handle with care.
This way up.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic

equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste
and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information concerning
the decommissioning of your equipment.
Recycled materials or may be recycled.
Recyclable Lithium-ion.
European authorized representative.
European Union Conformity Mark.
Indicates that the product is certified for both the U.S. and
Canadian markets.
FCC. USA only. Complies with applicable US government (Federal

Communications Commission) radio-frequency interference
regulations.
CAUTION U.S. federal law restricts this device to

sale by or on the order of a physician.
Russia only. GOST-R mark.
32
2106778-002
System introduction

Eurasian Economic Union countries only. Eurasian Conformity
mark. Conformity to applicable technical regulations of Customs
Union.
Brazil only. INMETRO certificate.
NOTE: The following symbols (required by China law only) are

representative of what you may see on your equipment.
The number in the symbol indicates the EFUP period in years, as
explained below. Check the symbol on your equipment for its
EFUP period.
This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials
in excess of the limits established by the Chinese standard GB/T
26572 Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Products. The
number in the symbol is the Environment-friendly User Period
(EFUP), which indicates the period during which the hazardous
substances or elements contained in electronic information
products will not leak or mutate under normal operating
conditions so that the use of such electronic information
products will not result in any severe environmental pollution,
any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period
is "Year".
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be
operated normally according to the instructions and
environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and
periodic maintenance schedules specified in Product
Maintenance Procedures shall be followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an
EFUP value less than the product. Periodic replacement of those
consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP shall be
done in accordance with the Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal
waste, and must be collected separately and handled properly
after decommissioning.
This symbol indicates that this electronic information product
does not contain any hazardous substance or elements above
the maximum concentration value established by the Chinese
standard GB/T 26572, and can be recycled after being discarded,
and should not be casually discarded.
Underwriters Laboratories product certification mark.
33
2106778-002

Canada only. Industry Canada certification number indicates
IC that this product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical
specifications.
China only. Chinese Compulsory Certification as required by

AQSIQ. Safety & EMC compliance.
China only. China Ministry of Industry and Information

CMIIT ID Technology identification number for Radio Transmission
Equipment Type Approval.
Australia only. The product complies with the applicable

Australian standard and establishes a traceable link between the
equipment and the manufacturer, importer or their agent
responsible for compliance.
Japan only. The PSE mark (Product Safety Electric Appliance and
Materials) is a mandatory mark required on Electrical Appliances
in Japan as authorized by the Electrical Appliance and Material
Safety Law (DENAN). This mark signifies that a product complies
with the law according to a set of standards for electric devices.
Japan only. Approved under Japan TELEC requirements.
Brazil only. Approved under ANATEL (Agência Nacional de

Telecomunicações) requirements.
South Africa only. Approved under ICASA (Independent

Communications Authority of South Africa) requirements.
Korea only. Approved under KCC (Korea Communications

Commission) requirements.
Ukraine only. Mark of conformity with the Technical Regulations.

This product meets the requirements of the Technical
Regulations on medical devices, approved by Resolution No. 753
of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine on October 2nd 2013.
34
2106778-002
System introduction
3.8 User interface symbols

The following symbols appear in the software user interface
Alarm off indicator.
The symbol may not display at the central station or on a remote bedside
monitor.
Alarm priority indicator: High (red). Indicates a high priority alarm.
Alarm priority indicator: Medium (yellow). Indicates a medium priority

alarm.
Alarm priority indicator: Low (cyan). Indicates a low priority alarm.
Alarm volume icon. Adjust the minimum alarm tone volume.
Audio alarms off indicator.
Audio alarms paused indicator with countdown timer - Indicates all audio
alarms are paused and the amount of time remaining for the alarm pause
period displays as a countdown timer.
Pause audio alarms - Selectable from the monitor’s main menu. Also an
indicator of a temporarily paused active audio alarm.
Low priority audio off alarm indicator.
General warning sign. Displays when the priority setting

deviates from the recommendation of international alarm safety
standards.
Reminder volume icon. Adjust the volume of the tone that sounds every
two minutes when audio alarms are turned off.
Touch volume icon. Adjust the volume of the tone that sounds when a
user touches a touchscreen display.
Home icon. Close all menus/applications displayed on the patient

monitor.
35
2106778-002

Locking setting indicator. Indicates this setting is locked and cannot be
adjusted.
Network connection indicator. Indicates the patient monitor is connected

to the Local Area Network (LAN).
Network connection indicator. Indicates the monitor is connected to the

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN).
Network (WLAN) signal strength. The number of segments corresponds to

the signal strength: four segments indicate strong signal, one segment
weak signal.
Monitor battery is full.
Monitor battery (green). The higher the charge, the bigger the green bar
within the symbol. Numbers indicate the remaining run time.
Monitor battery (yellow). This symbol and a message indicating low

battery charge appear when there is less than 20 minutes of run time left.
Monitor battery (red). This symbol and a message indicating empty

battery appear when there is less than 5 minutes of run time left.
Monitor battery is charging. There is a white running bar inside the

symbol.
Monitor battery failure indicator. Indicates a missing battery or a battery

failure.
PDM battery charging indicator. Indicates the battery is charging.
36
2106778-002
System introduction
PDM battery gauge indicator. Indicates the charge level of the battery.
PDM battery failure indicator. Indicates the battery is not available for use.
Snapshot indicator. Indicates the event has an associated snapshot.
Beat source indicator.
Respiration indicator. Indicates a breath is detected by the impedance

respiration algorithm.
BIS and Entropy sensor impedance check indicator (gray). Displays for
each sensor as the impedance check is in progress.
BIS and Entropy sensor impedance check error indicator (red). Indicates
the specified sensor failed the impedance check.
BIS and Entropy sensor impedance check passed indicator. Indicates the
specified sensor passed the impedance check.
Completed NIBP volume icon. Adjust the volume of the tone that sounds
when an NIBP measurement result is available.
Manual NIBP icon. Start a manual NIBP measurement.
Nellcor OxiMax SatSeconds indicator. Indicates the amount of time the

SpO2 saturation is outside the limits before alarms are generated.
37
2106778-002

SpO2 signal strength indicator. Indicates the signal strength, with three
asterisks indicating the strongest signal.
NMT Stimulus beep volume icon. Adjust the volume of the tone that
sounds when a stimulus pulse is generated.
Progress bar. Indicates the amount of time remaining until the next
automatic measurement.
38
2106778-002
Using Webmin service interface
4 Using Webmin service interface

Webmin is a browser-based service interface that is used to configure the platform settings of
the patient monitor and to diagnose and retrieve system information for maintenance and
troubleshooting.
Local access to Webmin

You can access Webmin locally through the integrated browser on the patient monitor or from
a configured service PC that is connected to the patient monitor with an Ethernet crossover
cable. Depending on the monitor hardware configuration, the crossover cable is connected
either to the IX connector or to the MC connector.
Remote Webmin
You can access Webmin remotely from a configured service PC that is connected to the patient
monitor over the IX Network.
Requirements for service PC

• Network board with Ethernet port and TCP/IP network installed.
• Internet Explorer V6 or later.
4.1 Local access to Webmin using the integrated browser

on the patient monitor
NOTE: A USB keyboard and mouse are needed to access the integrated Webmin browser.
1. Select Monitor Setup > Service. The local browser opens and displays the Login to
Webmin dialog box.
39
2106778-002
2. Continue to 4.5. Login to Webmin.
Closing Webmin
Select to close Webmin and return to the main display.
4.2 Local access to Webmin with a service PC connected

to the IX connector
You can access Webmin locally by connecting an Ethernet crossover cable between the
service PC and the IX connector of the patient monitor.
NOTE: This connection method is supported only if the monitor is equipped with the Advanced
Interface Board that provides both the IX and the MC connectors.
NOTE: If you disconnect the patient monitor from a live IX Network when a patient is admitted,
you will temporarily lose the services provided by the IX Network, e.g., access to the IX printers
and MUSE reports.
WARNING Non-medical equipment does not provide the same level of protection
against electrical shock. Do not touch the patient and any part of
non-medical equipment at the same time. Some examples of non-medical
equipment are laser printers and non-medical computers.
1. Connect a service PC to the IX connector on the patient monitor using a crossover cable.
2. In patient monitor, select Monitor Setup > Service. The local browser opens and displays
the Login to Webmin dialog box.
3. Record the IX IP address of the patient monitor:

IX IP address: ______________________

IX Netmask: ______________________
40
2106778-002
NOTE: If the IX IP address field is shown as 0.0.0.0., you need to configure the patient monitor’s
IX Network address first. Access Webmin using the integrated browser and configure a static IP
address for the IX Network.
4. Configure the service PC’s IP address and subnet mask to the same network segment
with the patient monitor’s IX Network setting.
NOTE: For more information on how to configure the IP address, refer to the PC’s
documentation.
5. Launch a web browser on the service PC.
6. In the Address field, type https://[IX IP address]:10000 and press Enter.
NOTE: [IX IP address] is the IX Network IP address of the patient monitor.
The Login to Webmin dialog box displays.
Closing Webmin
1. Restore the patient monitor’s original IX Network configuration and service PC’s network
settings if they were changed.
2. Disconnect the crossover cable from the patient monitor and from the service PC.
3. Reconnect the patient monitor back to the IX Network if applicable.
41
2106778-002
4.3 Local access to Webmin with a service PC connected

to the MC connector
You can access Webmin locally by connecting an Ethernet crossover cable between the
service PC and the MC connector of the patient monitor.
NOTE: This connection method is available only if the monitor is equipped with the Standard
Interface Board that provides only the MC connector and the patient monitor is in a discharged
state.
NOTE: Ensure that there is no patient admitted, prior to disconnecting the monitor from a live
MC or S/5 Network.
NOTE: Normal patient monitoring is disabled in this connection method. You must exit the
maintenance mode to re-enable the normal patient monitoring mode. (Refer to “Closing
Webmin’ on page 43.)
1. Connect a service PC to the MC connector on the patient monitor using a crossover cable.
2. Select Monitor Setup > Service calibrations.
3. Log in with your biomed username and password and press Enter.
4. Record the MC IP Address shown next to the Start Maintenance Mode –menu button:
MC IP Address: ______________________

MC Netmask: ______________________
5. Select Start Maintenance Mode.

A screen saver with the text “Note: Monitor temporarily under maintenance” appears on
the screen.
with the monitor’s MC Network.
documentation.
8. In the Address field, type https://[MC IP address]:10000 and press Enter.
NOTE: [MC IP address] is the MC Network IP address of the patient monitor.
42
2106778-002
The Login to Webmin dialog box displays.


Closing Webmin
1. You can exit the monitor’s maintenance mode any time by using the Trim Knob, using the
touchscreen or clicking a mouse button. The monitor will automatically restore the
original network configuration to the S/5 or MC Network and return to the normal
monitoring mode.
2. Restore the original network settings in the service PC.
3. Disconnect the crossover cable from the monitor and from the service PC.
4. Reconnect the monitor back to the S/5 or MC Network if applicable.
4.4 Remote access to Webmin using a service PC over the

IX Network
NOTE: This connection method is supported only if the monitor is equipped with the Advanced
Interface Board that provides both the IX and the MC connectors and the monitor is connected
to a live IX Network.
1. Connect a service PC to the IX Network using a standard network cable.
2. In patient monitor, select Monitor Setup > Service. The local browser opens and displays
the Login to Webmin dialog box.
3. Record the IX IP address of the patient monitor:
IX IP address: ______________________

43
2106778-002
IX Netmask: ______________________
with the patient monitor’s IX Network.
documentation.
6. In the Address field, type https://[IX IP address]:10000 and press Enter.
NOTE: [IX IP address] is the IX Network IP address of the patient monitor.

The Login to Webmin dialog box displays.
Closing Webmin:
1. Restore the original network settings in the service PC.
2. Disconnect the service PC from the live IX Network.
4.5 Login to Webmin

1. In the Login to Webmin dialog box, type the username and password and select Login or
press Enter.
Username: biomed
Password: Change<space>Me
44
2106778-002
NOTE: Username and password are case sensitive.

NOTE: “Change Me” is the factory default password for the username “biomed”. Refer to
section 7.13. Password management for details on how to change the default password or
reset a forgotten password.
The Webmin application opens and defaults to the Information tab.

Figure 1 Webmin user interface when accessed using the integrated browser
Figure 2 Webmin user interface when accessed using the service PC
45
2106778-002
4.6 Webmin configuration modules
The Webmin service interface includes the following configuration modules. Select Help for
additional information related to each Webmin module.
Webmin module Use the module

Admit Settings to configure Patient ID Prefix and barcode settings.
Certificate Management to manage SSL certificates installed on the system. With
this module, self-signed certificates and certificate
signing requests (CSR) can be generated. Certificates
can be imported, exported, deleted and viewed.
Host Asset Settings to enter a host asset number and to view the host serial
number.
Language to select the language used in clinical user interface and
to select the keyboard locale setting for the
alphanumeric keyboard and the barcode reader.
Licenses to enable and activate a software package, to enable
and activate software features and to upload and
activate a license file.
MUSE/12SL to configure the host for sending and viewing 12SL
information.
46
2106778-002
Webmin module Use the module

Modules to configure some acquisition module specific settings
after corrective maintenance, or for administrative
purposes. These settings are saved to the permanent
memory of the related acquisition module and the
settings travel with the module from one patient monitor
to another.
Refer to the Module Frames and Modules Service
Manual for detailed information how to change these
settings.
National Requirements to activate France specific defaults for the ECG HR
adjustment range and the reminder beep behavior.
Network to select and configure the real-time network as the MC
Network (CARESCAPE Network or S/5 Network). It also
allows the user to configure the IX and ADT Network
settings.
Passwords to change the passwords for the biomed and clinical
users.
Power frequency to set the power line frequency.
Printers to configure the patient monitor to print to up to 12 laser
printers connected on the IX Network. There are
sub-modules for installing a printer, deleting a printer
and for printing a test page.
Remote Service to configure and control the InSite RSvP remote service
tool.
Restart to shutdown and restart the patient monitor
automatically via Webmin.
NOTE: The patient must be discharged in order to enable
monitor restart via Webmin.
Settings to transfer platform and/or clinical settings from one
patient monitor to another, to take backup copies of the
settings to an external device and to restore the settings
from an external device.
Software Management to update patient monitor and parameter module
software.
Time to set the date and time settings.
Unit and bed name to configure the care unit name and bed name for
patient monitors that are configured to connect to the
MC Network.
WLAN to configure the WLAN client settings for the MC
Network or S/5 Network.
47
2106778-002
4.7 Webmin information modules

The Webmin information modules provide useful information about the patient monitor setup
especially for troubleshooting.
The Configuration Information module shows the current platform configuration of the patient
monitor and the connected peripheral devices.
The Device Information module shows the hardware and software information of the patient
4.8 Webmin diagnostics modules

Access Webmin service interface to view hardware statistics, ping a network device, view
WLAN diagnostics and view or download log files.
The Hardware Statistics module displays several internal voltages, temperatures and power
consumption.
48
2106778-002
Ping a TCP/IP network device- Use this Webmin feature to verify connectivity with a network
device on the MC Network and IX Network.
Log files - The patient monitor collects information about different system events and errors to
log files. These log files help troubleshooting problems in the patient monitor and the
connected peripheral devices.
WLAN diagnostics- Use this Webmin feature for troubleshooting WLAN related problems. This
Webmin module provides information about the WLAN driver, WLAN status and the detected
access points.
49
2106778-002
For your notes:
50
2106778-002
Pre-installation requirements
5 Pre-installation requirements
This chapter specifies the pre-installation requirements for the patient monitor.
5.1 Unpacking
1. Confirm that the packing box is undamaged. If the box is damaged, contact the shipper.
2. Open the top of the box and carefully unpack all components.
3. Confirm that all components are undamaged. If any of the components is damaged,
contact the shipper.
4. Confirm that all components are included. If any of the components is missing, contact
your GE Healthcare distributor.
WARNING EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE CURRENT - If the device has been transported or stored
outside operating temperature range allow it to stabilize back to operating
temperature range before removing it from the plastic bag.
CAUTION PACKAGING DISPOSAL - Dispose of the packaging material, observing the
applicable waste control regulations.
5.2 Compatibility check

Verify the compatibility of all system components prior to the installation of the patient
monitor.
• Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for a list of compatible
network and bedside devices.
• Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for a list of compatible
supplies and accessories.
• Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual and Unity Network
Interface Device (ID) Operator's Manual to see compatible peripheral devices.
WARNING BEFORE INSTALLATION - Compatibility is critical to safe and effective use of
this device. Please contact your local sales or service representative prior to
installation to verify equipment compatibility.
WARNING INTERFACING OTHER EQUIPMENT - Connect only items that are specified as
part of the system and as compatible. For more information, see the
CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Supplemental Information Manual.
WARNING Before connecting an interfacing module to the device, verify compatibility.
Verify the connectivity of device interfaces before using the equipment.
Verify the compatibility of software versions before using the equipment.
WARNING Do not use identical measurement modules or modules that map a
measurement to the same channel or parameter window. If such modules
have been connected, remove the module that has been most recently
connected. You can also remove both modules and re-connect the new
module after five seconds.
51
2106778-002
WARNING The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified
may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity performance of
the equipment or system.
WARNING For detailed instructions and information regarding supplies and
accessories, always refer to their own instructions for use.
5.3 Network infrastructure

Ensure that the applicable network infrastructure is in place prior to the installation of the
patient monitor.
Acquire the network configuration information from the hospital IT or the related project
documentation and installation files.
5.3.1 MC Network
• The MC Network infrastructure shall be installed according to the CARESCAPE Network
Configuration Guide.
• The installation site of the patient monitor shall have a wall jack and a network patch
cable for the MC Network.
• Refer to the sections 7.2.2. Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network and 7.4. Setting
unit and bed name to see the configuration information you need to have available to
configure the patient monitor to the MC Network.
5.3.2 Wireless MC Network

• The wireless MC Network infrastructure shall be installed according to the CARESCAPE
Wireless Network Configuration Guide.
• Ensure that the wireless coverage area is adequate for the installation.
• Refer to the sections 7.2.2. Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network, 7.2.4.
Configuring WLAN and 7.4. Setting unit and bed name to see the configuration
information you need to have available to configure the patient monitor to the wireless
MC Network.
5.3.3 S/5 Network

• The S/5 Network shall be installed according to the S/5 Network Installation Guide. Refer
to the iCentral and iCentral Client Service Manual for iCentral installation instructions.
cable for the S/5 Network.
• Refer to the section 7.2.3. Selecting and configuring S/5 Network to see the configuration
information you need to have available to configure the patient monitor to the wired S/5
Network.
5.3.4 S/5 Wireless Network

• The S/5 Wireless Network shall be installed according to the S/5 Network Installation
Guide. Refer to the iCentral and iCentral Client Service Manual for iCentral installation
instructions.
• Ensure that the wireless coverage area is adequate for the installation.
52
2106778-002
• Refer to the sections 7.2.3. Selecting and configuring S/5 Network and 7.2.4. Configuring
WLAN to see the configuration information you need to have available to configure the
patient monitor to the S/5 Wireless Network.
5.3.5 IX Network
• The IX Network infrastructure shall be installed according to the CARESCAPE Network
Configuration Guide.
cable for the IX Network.
• Refer to the section 7.2.2. Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network to see the
configuration information you need to have available to configure the patient monitor to
the IX Network.
• Refer to the following sections for the information you need to have available for:
 7.5. Configuring printers for IX printer configuration
 7.6. Configuring MUSE/12SL
 7.15.1. Configuring the remote service for InSite RSvP configuration.
5.4 Installing the mounting hardware

Ensure that all the applicable/ required mounting hardware is properly installed prior to the
installation of the patient monitor:
• Mounting hardware for the patient monitor, either for a stand-alone installation or for an
installation to an anesthesia machine or to a ventilator
• Mounting hardware for the PSM module
• Mounting hardware for the PDM module
• Mounting hardware for the displays
• Mounting hardware for the Unity Network ID connectivity device
NOTE: Refer to the CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Mounting Solutions to identify thecompatible
mounting hardware for each system component above. Each mounting kit includes the
necessary hardware and the installation instructions.
WARNING Use only manufacturer specified mounts.
5.5 Unity Network ID connectivity device installation

The Unity Network ID connectivity device shall be properly installed, configured and tested
according to the Unity Network ID Connectivity Device Service Manual prior to connecting it to
the patient monitor.
Make sure that the Unity Network ID connectivity device is configured as follows:
• IP address is 192.168.253.x, where x is a number between 2 and 254.
• Netmask is 255.255.255.0
• The location of the Unity Network ID is set to a value other than the default (XXXX-XXX).
For example, BAY3|UNID3+.
Refer to the Unity Network Interface Device (ID) Service Manual for instructions on checking
and changing the IP address.
53
2106778-002
5.6 Power and environmental requirements

Check the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for power and environmental
requirements.
WARNING Operation of the monitor outside the specified performance range may
cause inaccurate results.
CAUTION Do not use or store equipment outside the specified temperature, humidity, or
altitude ranges.
Power requirements
• The installation site shall have hospital-grade grounded power outlets and power cords
for all system components.
• Verify that the power outlet is wired correctly according to the country’s electrical code
standard.
WARNING EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE CURRENT - A display or printer that is a non-medical
grade device and is used within the patient environment, must always be
powered from an additional transformer providing at least basic isolation
(isolating or separating transformer). Using without an isolating
transformer could result in unacceptable enclosure leakage currents.
Environmental requirements
• Install the patient monitor to a location that meets the specified environmental
requirements of operating temperature, humidity and atmospheric pressure.
• Set up the device in a location which affords sufficient ventilation. The ventilation
openings of the device must not be obstructed.
EMI & RFI interference:

WARNING Do not use the monitor in high electromagnetic fields (for example,
during magnetic resonance imaging).
WARNING Other equipment may interfere with the system, even if that other
equipment complies with CISPR emission requirements.
CAUTION EMC - Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper
performance of the device. For this reason make sure that all external devices
operated in the vicinity of the monitor comply with the relevant EMC
requirements. X-ray equipment or MRI devices are a possible source of
interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Changes or modifications to this device/system not expressly approved by GE
may cause EMC issues with this or other equipment. This device/system is
designed and tested to comply with applicable standards and regulations
regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information stated as follows: This device/system is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to the public
low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes. Mains power should be that of a typical commercial or hospital
environment. Device is compliant to Class A.
54
2106778-002
CAUTION Use of known RF sources, such as cell/portable phones, or other radio

frequency (RF) emitting equipment near the system may cause unexpected or
adverse operation of this device/system. Consult qualified personnel regarding
device/system configuration.
• The patient monitor should be isolated from sources of strong electromagnetic and radio
frequency interference.
NOTE: Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for more information.
55
2106778-002
For your notes:
56
2106778-002
Hardware installation
6 Hardware installation
CAUTION LOSS OF MONITORING - Leave space for circulation of air to prevent the
monitor from overheating. The manufacturer is not responsible for damage to
equipment caused by improperly vented cabinets, improper or faulty power, or
insufficient wall strength to support equipment mounted on such walls.
WARNING The parameter modules are not able to withstand unpacked drops from a
height of 1 m without damage. If a module is dropped, please service it
before taking it back into use.
WARNING After transferring or reinstalling the monitor, always check that it is
properly connected and all parts are securely attached.
WARNING SITE REQUIREMENTS - Do not route cables or tubing in a way that they may
present a stumbling hazard.
WARNING EXPLOSION - Do not use this equipment in the presence of flammable
anesthetics, vapors or liquids.
WARNING EXCESSIVE TOUCH CURRENT - To avoid excessive patient leakage current,
do not simultaneously touch the patient and the electrical connectors
located at the rear panel of the monitor, or within the module housing,
frames, or battery slot.
6.1 Installing a battery into the patient monitor and the

PDM module
The batteries for the patient monitor and the PDM module, if included, are shipped separately
and need to be installed and fully charged prior to taking into use.
WARNING PHYSICAL INJURY- Make sure the battery is completely inserted and the
battery door is completely closed. Falling batteries could seriously or fatally
injure neonatal or other vulnerable patients.
WARNING EXPLOSION OR FIRE -Using non-recommended batteries could result in
injury/burns to the patients or users. Only use batteries recommended or
manufactured by GE.
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do not incinerate a battery or store at high
temperatures. Serious injury or death could result.
NOTE: Refer to section 10.4. Monitor battery maintenance in this manual for maintenance
instructions of the patient monitor battery. Refer to the Module Frames and Modules Service
Manual for information about PDM battery maintenance.
6.1.1 Testing the battery charge

Before installing a battery, verify the battery’s state of charge. Press the green TEST button on
the battery. The number of charge level indicator LEDs that illuminate indicates the
approximate charge remaining in the battery.
 Four LEDs illuminated: 75% – 100% of full-charge capacity.
57
2106778-002
 Three LEDs illuminated: 50% – 74.9% of full-charge capacity.

 Two LEDs illuminated: 25% – 49.9% of full-charge capacity.
 One LED illuminated: 10% – 24.9% of full-charge capacity.
 One LED flashing: < 10% of full-charge capacity remaining.
NOTE: Before taking the patient monitor into use for the first time, the battery should be fully
charged. Keep the PDM connected to the patient monitor and the patient monitor connected to
the AC mains until the batteries are fully charged.
6.1.2 Installing the battery into the patient monitor

WARNING LOSS OF MONITORING. If the supply mains is interrupted and there is no
battery power available, the B650 may cease to function. If the B650 is
equipped with the optional battery, always use the monitor with the battery
inserted. This will ensure the functioning of the monitor during possible
supply mains interruptions.
1. Open the battery cover by turning the battery cover lock 90 degrees clockwise.
2. Insert the battery with the test indicator side up and the connector end first all the way
into the battery slot. To remove the battery, pull it out from the cord.
3. Push the cover back up and lock it in place by turning the lock 90 degrees
counter-clockwise.
6.1.3 Installing the battery into the PDM module

1. Open the battery door by gently pulling on the battery door pull tab.
2. Pull the battery tray out of the PDM using the battery tray strap.
3. Insert the battery with the TEST button facing up and the arrow pointing into the PDM.
58
2106778-002
4. Press the battery door closed until it seals the battery compartment.
6.2 Mounting the patient monitor

The patient monitor has an integrated GCX mounting plate. This facilitates all mounting options
for the patient monitor. Refer to the CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Mounting Solutions to
identify the compatible mounting hardware for the patient monitor.
Install the patient monitor to the mounting hardware according to the installation instructions
included with the mounting hardware.
WARNING Never install equipment above the patient.
WARNING To prevent liquids from entering the monitor, do not tilt the monitor more
than +-15 degrees. If the monitor is used as a stationary bedside monitor
with CARESCAPE respiratory modules or PDM, do not tilt it at all.
CAUTION The device/system should not be used adjacent to, or stacked with, other
equipment. Consult qualified personnel regarding device/system configuration.
59
2106778-002
6.3 Connecting a secondary display

The patient monitor supports one secondary, clone display.
WARNING Do not connect a monochrome display to the monitor. Visual alarm

indicators may not appear properly.
WARNING The secondary display will not sound the audible alarms.
WARNING To prevent liquids from entering the display, do not tilt the display more
than +/-15 degrees.
NOTE: Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for a list of compatible
secondary displays.
NOTE: Refer to the display's user manual for more information about the display installation.
NOTE: Ensure that the display is installed to the mounting hardware according to the
installation instructions included with the mounting hardware.
NOTE: Make sure that all cables are securely connected.
NOTE: Refer to section 7.1. Adjusting display for information about touchscreen calibration and
display adjustments.
NOTE: All installations should be compliant with IEC 60601-1 and local electrical codes.
NOTE: The patient monitor with a non-medical grade display, which is IEC 60950-rated or
equivalent, meets UL and IEC specifications if a medical grade isolation is used. If a
non-medical grade display is to be used, the configuration must meet the IEC 60601-1
standard. Refer to IEC 60601-1 for requirements if using non-medical grade displays in the
patient environment.
6.3.1 Connections to D15K and D19KT displays

The following instructions describe two methods to connect a D15K or D19KT display as a
secondary display.
DVI-I connector Type B USB port
Type A USB ports
A) Cable length is less than 5 meters

1. Connect one end of the DVI-D to DVI-D video cable to the DVI-I connector on the bottom
of the display and the other end to the DVI-I connector on the back of the patient monitor.
2. Connect the Type A plug of the standard USB cable to one of the downstream ports
(Type A USB port) on the back of the patient monitor.
3. Connect the Type B plug of the standard USB cable to the upstream port (Type B USB port)
on the bottom of the display.
60
2106778-002
4. Secure the USB cables connections to the displays according to the instruction included
in the display package.
NOTE: A USB hub should not be used to connect the USB touchscreen to the patient monitor.
B) Cable length is 5 to 15 meters
If complete isolation is not required, this method will provide the most cost effective means of
extending your USB installation. This type of installation should not be used for connections to
non-medically used rooms according to IEC 60601-1.
Displays may be extended up to 15 meters from the patient monitor using the following cables:
 15-meter DVI-I to DVI-I video cable (p/n 2042766-001).
 5-meter USB extender (p/n 2042768-001)
 Standard USB-A to USB-B cable, up to 5 meters.
Type A receptacle
USB extender Type A plug
In the following example, two 5-meter USB extenders, plus a standard 5-meter USB cable
extend the remote display up to 15 meters from the patient monitor.
Remote
display
A B
C D
1st USB extender 2nd USB extender Standard USB

cable (5m / 16 ft) cable (5m / 16 ft) cable (5m / 16 ft)
Single port USB hub Single port USB hub

DVI-I cable (15 m / 49 ft)
A to D = DVI-D connection
B to C = USB remote (2 USB extenders required)
USB-connection:
1. Connect the Type A plug of the 1st USB extender to one of the downstream ports (Type A
USB port) on the back of the patient monitor.
2. Connect the Type A plug of the 2nd USB extender to the Type A receptacle on the 1st USB
extender.
3. Connect the Type A plug of the standard USB cable to the Type A receptacle on the 2nd
USB extender.
4. Connect the Type B plug of the standard USB cable to the upstream port (Type B USB port)
on the bottom of the display.
61
2106778-002
5. Secure the USB cables connections to the displays according to the instruction included
in the display package.
Video cable:
Connect one end of the 15-meter DVI-I to DVI-I video cable to the DVI-I connector on the
bottom of the display and the other end to the DVI-I connector on the back of the patient
monitor.
6.4 Installing parameter modules

Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual to verify compatible
parameter modules and to identify the parameter modules with identical measurements.
WARNING Ensure that the CARESCAPE respiratory modules are in vertical position
when used. Tilting them may result in erroneous readings.
6.4.1 Installing a PSM or a PDM module

You can install a PSM or a PDM module either to the patient monitor or to a remote mounting
solution.
Connecting a PSM or a PDM module to the patient monitor

1. Connect a module by aligning it with the insertion guides on the pivoting module frame.
2. Push the module into the frame until it clicks and stops.
Installing a PSM module to a pole mount

Ensure that the Pole Mount for PSM is properly installed to an IV pole according to the
installation guide included with the mounting hardware.
WARNING PHYSICAL INJURY- Take care when mounting devices to an IV pole. If a
device is mounted too high the IV pole may become unbalanced and tip
over.
1. Connect the PSM module to the Pole Mount for PSM as instructed in the accompanying
installation guide.
2. Connect the Module Bus Adapter for PSM to the PSM connector in the patient monitor.
3. Connect the cable from the Pole Mount for PSM to the Module Bus Adapter for PSM.
62
2106778-002
Installing a PDM module to a mounting solution

WARNING PHYSICAL INJURY- Take care when mounting devices to an IV pole. If a
device is mounted too high the IV pole may become unbalanced and tip
over.
WARNING PHYSICAL INJURY — Do not install the PDM above a patient. Make sure the
battery is completely inserted and the battery door is completely closed.
Falling batteries could seriously or fatally injure neonatal or other
vulnerable patients.
WARNING PHYSICAL INJURY — Do not install the PDM above a patient. Leaks from the
battery cells can occur under extreme conditions. The liquid is caustic to the
eyes and skin. If the liquid comes in contact with eyes or skin, flush with
clean water and seek medical attention.
WARNING To avoid accidental ingress of liquids, do not tilt the PDM in any direction or
mount the PDM in a vertical position with the patient cables facing up or
down.
Mounting options include mounting to a bed headboard or footboard, an IV pole, or a roll stand
using one of the docking stations. Mounting kits include all necessary hardware and
installation instructions. Ensure that the selected PDM mount is properly installed according to
the installation instructions included.
1. Connect the PDM module to installed mounting hardware as instructed in the
accompanying installation instructions.
2. Connect one end of the ePort cable to the PDM module ePort connector.
3. Connect the other end of the ePort cable to the ePort connector in the rear panel of the
patient monitor.
NOTE: The PDM module can be installed into a pole mount only if the monitor is equipped with
the Advanced Interface Board that provides the ePort connector.
Installing E-modules to the patient monitor

1. Connect a module by aligning it with the insertion guide inside the module slot.
2. Push the module into the frame until it locks.
63
2106778-002
6.5 Connecting to the mains power

WARNING Use only AC power cords recommended or manufactured by GE.
WARNING EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE CURRENT - To avoid summation of leakage currents
when interfacing the device with other equipment, the devices may only be
interconnected with each other or to parts of the system when it has been
determined by qualified biomedical personnel that there is no danger to the
patient, the operator, or the environment as a result. In those instances
where there is any element of doubt concerning the safety of the connected
devices, the user must contact the manufacturers concerned (or other
informed experts) for proper use. In all cases, safe and proper operation
should be verified with the applicable manufacturer's instructions for use,
and system standards IEC60601-1 must be complied with.
WARNING Do not under any circumstances remove the grounding conductor from the
power plug. Always check that power cord and plug are intact and
undamaged.
WARNING POWER SUPPLY — Always connect the device power cable to a properly
installed power outlet with protective earth contacts before connecting any
network cables (MC and IX networks). If the integrity of the protective earth
conductor is in doubt or there is no protective earth available, do not
connect the monitor to the power line, but instead use it with the battery
option, if available. When using the device with battery power, do not
connect the network cables. All devices of a system must be connected to
the same power supply circuit. Devices which are not connected to the
same circuit must be electrically isolated when operated.
64
2106778-002
CAUTION POWER REQUIREMENTS - Before connecting the device to the power line, check
that the voltage and frequency ratings of the power line are the same as those
indicated on the device's label. If this is not the case, do not connect the system
to the power line until you adjust the device to match the power source. In
U.S.A., if the installation of this equipment will use 240V rather than 120V, the
source must be a center-tapped, 240V, single-phase circuit. This equipment is
suitable for connection to public mains as defined in CISPR 11.
If a non-medical grade display is used as a display within the patient environment it must
always be powered from an additional transformer providing at least basic isolation.
1. Connect power cords to the mains power supply inlet and to a wall outlet on all system
components that require AC mains power input.
2. Do not power on any devices.
NOTE: Be sure that all power cords are securely connected and that they are routed through
the retaining clips or cable clamps, as applicable.
6.6 Connecting to the MC Network or the S/5 Network

WARNING MISSED ALARMS - Do not use with iCentral software with Versions 5.0.3 and
earlier or with Mobile Care Server with Version 5.2 and earlier.
WARNING INCORRECT CALCULATIONS - Using the System with the Aware Gateway
software version 1.4 or earlier could result in incorrect patient height and
weight information. This could lead to incorrect drug dose calculations,
hemodynamic calculations, or oxygenation calculations. Prior to installing
the System, please contact the GE Healthcare Aware Gateway HL7
Integration Engineering Team or your GE Healthcare service representative
to verify or update your Aware Gateway configuration.
WARNING EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE CURRENT - Only devices that are specified compliant
with IEC 60950-1 or IEC 60601-1 may be connected to the Ethernet MC or IX
ports.
The patient monitor can be connected either to the wired MC Network or S/5 Network.
• Connect the MC Network or the S/5 Network patch cable to the network connector
labelled as “MC” in the rear panel of the patient monitor.
65
2106778-002
6.7 Connecting to the IX Network

• Connect the IX Network patch cable to the network connector labelled as “IX” in the rear
panel of the patient monitor.
NOTE: Connection to the IX Network is possible only if the monitor is equipped with the
Advanced Interface Board.
6.8 Connecting to a Unity Network ID connectivity device

Ensure that the Unity Network ID connectivity device is properly mounted, installed and
configured prior to connecting it to the patient monitor.
CAUTION INSTALLATION - To avoid accidental ingress of liquids, always mount the Unity
Network Interface Device (ID) in a vertical position with the connectors at the
bottom.
• Connect a Unity Network ID connectivity device to the network connector labelled “ID” in
the rear panel of the patient monitor.
NOTE: Connection to the Unity Network ID connectivity device is possible only if the monitor is
equipped with the Advanced Interface Board.
WARNING Before connecting an interfacing module to the device, verify compatibility.
Verify the connectivity of device interfaces before using the equipment.
Verify the compatibility of software versions before using the equipment.
CAUTION The use of the wrong interface adapter may cause improper operation of the
supported peripheral device.
WARNING SINGLE PATIENT USE - All eight serial ports of the Unity Network Interface
Device (ID) must only be used on one patient.
6.9 Connecting USB devices

NOTE: The USB-connection to a D15K or D19KT secondary display reserves one of the USB
connectors in the rear panel of the patient monitor.
Connect the following devices to the USB ports in the rear panel of the patient monitor or the
display:
• Alphanumeric keyboard
• Mouse
• Remote control
• Barcode reader
NOTE: Always use a GE-supplied barcode reader for the CARESCAPE monitors. Refer to the
included installation instructions for more details.
WARNING Use only washable keyboard with at least IPX1 protection against ingress of
water.
66
2106778-002
6.10 Connecting iCollect and other data acquisition

systems
iCollect and other data acquisition systems can be connected to one of the USB connectors in
the rear panel of the patient monitor.
NOTE: Use the ATEN UC232A USB-to-serial Converter and PC serial interface cable to connect
iCollect and the other data acquisition systems to the patient monitor.
2nd USB to serial

1st USB to serial PC serial interface
converter, if
converter cable, 881167
needed
NOTE: Refer to the iCollect User's Manual for more information about the iCollect.
NOTE: Contact GE Healthcare Service to get more information about interfacing other data
acquisition systems to the patient monitor.
6.11 Connecting a remote-on cable

Remote-on connection allows you to power-up the patient monitor from the power switch of a
GE Healthcare anesthesia machine.
1. Connect the remote-on cable to the remote-on connector labelled as “X3” in the rear
panel of the patient monitor.
2. Connect the other end of the remote-on cable to the related connector in the anesthesia
machine. Refer to the related product documentation for details.
NOTE: Remote-on connection is possible only if the monitor is equipped with the Advanced
Interface Board that has the remote-on connector and if the anesthesia machine supports this
feature.
NOTE: Remote-on connection is possible only if the anesthesia machine supports this feature.
NOTE: The remote on/standby function is disabled when the patient monitor is battery
powered.
6.12 Connecting a local printer to the IX connector

You can connect a local laser printer directly to the patient monitor’s IX connector with a
crossover cable.
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the IX connector labelled as “IX” in the rear panel of the
patient monitor.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the connector in the laser
printer.
67
2106778-002
NOTE: Connection to a local printer is possible only if the monitor is equipped with the
Advanced Interface Board that provides an IX Network connector.
NOTE: If the local printer is used within the patient environment it must always be powered
from an additional transformer providing at least basic isolation.
NOTE: Refer to the printer manual on how to install and configure the printer. The printer shall
be configured to communicate in the same subnet with the patient monitor’s IX Network
settings.
WARNING EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE CURRENT - Laser printers are UL 60950/IEC 60950
certified equipment, which may not meet the leakage current requirements
of patient care equipment. This equipment must not be located in the
patient environment unless the medical system standard IEC 60601-1 is
followed. Do not connect a laser printer to a multiple socket outlet
supplying patient care equipment. The use of multiple socket outlet for a
system will result in an enclosure leakage current equal to the sum of all the
individual ground leakage currents of the system if there is an interruption
of the multiple socket outlet protective earth conductor.
WARNING Non-medical equipment does not provide the same level of protection
against electrical shock. Do not touch the patient and any part of
non-medical equipment at the same time. Some examples of non-medical
equipment are laser printers and non-medical computers.
68
2106778-002
Configuration
7 Configuration
The configuration of the patient monitor consists of platform configuration and clinical
configuration.
This chapter describes how to perform the platform configuration tasks needed to take the
patient monitor into use for the first time and the configuration tasks needed for administration
and maintenance thereafter.
For information on how to perform the clinical configuration, including care unit settings and
user profiles, refer to the patient monitor’s user’s manual.
7.1 Adjusting display

7.1.1 Adjusting the brightness of the integrated primary display
If needed, adjust the display brightness from the Monitor Setup > Brightness menu. Refer to
the patient monitor’s user’s manual for more information.
7.1.2 Calibrating a touchscreen

NOTE: The touchscreen function of the integrated primary screen has been calibrated in the
factory. Re-calibration is typically needed only after replacing the uDOM or the touchscreen
sensor.
Calibrate the connected touchscreens, one by one, as follows:
1. Select Monitor Setup > Service Calibrations.
2. In the Enter Password dialog box, type the username and password and press Enter.
Username: biomed
Password: Change<space>Me
NOTE: Username and password are case sensitive.
NOTE: The factory default password for the username “biomed” is “Change Me”.
3. In the Service / Calibrations menu, select Touch Screen to calibrate the integrated
primary display or the connected secondary display.
4. The Touch calibration screen opens.
5. Touch the calibration mark or cross hair (+) in each corner of the screen, according to the
instructions shown on the screen.
7.1.3 Adjusting optional secondary display

If needed, adjust the picture on the display using the Auto Adjustment feature in the display’s
OSD menu. Refer to the display's user manual for details.
7.2 Configuring the network

7.2.1 Configuring hostname
1. Log in to Webmin.
2. Select Configuration > Network > Hostname. 
The Hostname Configuration window opens.
The current hostname is shown in the Current Value column.
69
2106778-002
3. Enter the new hostname in the Change Value to column.

NOTE: The hostname is a unique, 4 to 32 character long identifier of a patient monitor in
the network. Use alphanumeric characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9. The hostname may include also
characters “-” and “_”, but it can't start or end with these characters.
4. Select Save.
The hostname configuration will take effect immediately.
7.2.2 Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network

To select CARESCAPE Network MC for the real-time network infrastructure:
2. Select Configuration > Network > Wired Interfaces.
The current network configuration is shown in the Present Configuration table.
3. Below Select Network Type in the Network Configuration window, select the applicable
network type: CARESCAPE Network.
4. Select Next to proceed on network configuration.
NOTE: When CARESCAPE Network is selected, the S/5 Network is disabled.
The patient monitor may be configured to the MC Network, or IX Network, or both.
Network connection(s) Steps to be performed

MC Network only 5, (6), and 9
IX Network only 7, 8, and 9
Both MC and IX Network 5, (6), 7, 8, and 9
NOTE: The following IP addresses are reserved for the monitor’s internal use: 192.168.249.x,
192.168.250.x, 192.168.252.x, 192.168.253.x, 192.168.254.1 and 192.168.254.2.
5. In the MC Network area.

a. Enter a Static IP address.
b. Enter a valid Netmask level.
6. If separate MC Network segments are connected together by a router, configure the
router information below the MC static route:
a. Enter Destination Address.
b. Enter Destination Netmask.
c. Enter an MC Gateway.
7. In the IX Network area, select DHCP or Manual Configuration. 
If Manual Configuration is selected, enter the following information in the entry fields:
c. Enter a valid Default Gateway.
d. Enter valid DNS Server addresses if applicable.
8. Enter a unique Custom IX MAC Address. By default, the MC Network MAC address is
shown here. Make sure that you do not use a MAC address that is already in use on your
network.
NOTE: The following addresses are reserved for the monitor’s internal use (RFC 7042):
• 00:00:5E:xx:xx:xx: Reserved for IANA unicast
70
2106778-002
Configuration
• 01:00:5E:xx:xx:xx: Reserved for IANA multicast

• 33:33:xx:xx:xx:xx: Reserved for IPv6 multicast
• CF:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx: Reserved by IANA for PPP
• FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF: Broadcast
• Multicast addresses in which the first octet is an odd number (for example,
97:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
9. Select Save.
The network configurations will be saved and become active when the patient monitor is
restarted.
7.2.3 Selecting and configuring S/5 Network

To select S/5 Network for the real-time network infrastructure:
2. Select Configuration > Network > Wired Interfaces.
The current network configuration is shown in the Present Configuration table.
3. Below Select Network Type in the Network Configuration window, select the applicable
network type: S/5.
4. Select Next to proceed on network configuration.
NOTE: When S/5 Network is selected, the CARESCAPE Network is disabled.
The patient monitor may be configured to the S/5 Network, or IX Network, or both.
Network connection(s) Steps to be performed

S/5 Network only 1 and 3
IX Network only 2 and 3
Both S/5 and IX Network 1, 2, and 3
1. In the Network Configuration window below S/5 Network, enter a Virtual ID.
NOTE: Valid values are within the range of 50000 to 55000, inclusive.
NOTE: The Virtual ID must be unique for each patient monitor connected to the S/5 Network.
2. Below IX Network, select DHCP or Manual Configuration.
c. Enter a valid Default Gateway.
d. Enter valid DNS Server addresses if applicable.
3. Select Save.
The S/5 virtual ID change will be applied immediately. All other network configurations will be
saved and become active after the patient monitor is restarted.
7.2.4 Configuring WLAN

NOTE: The network infrastructure selection, MC Network or S/5 Network, and related
configuration shall be completed prior to configuring the WLAN settings.
NOTE: Wireless communication is supported only in CARESCAPE Network MC and S/5 Network.
CARESCAPE Network IX does not support wireless communication.
71
2106778-002
2. Select Configuration > WLAN. The current status of the WLAN radio is shown below the
Current State in the WLAN Configuration window.
3. Select Enable as a New State to enable the WLAN radio.
NOTE: If the WLAN radio is disabled, the WLAN radio is turned off.
4. Select Antenna as Enabled to enable both the internal antennas.
NOTE: Antenna diversity is a method used to assist in compensating for multipath interference.
When set to Enabled, Antenna Diversity monitors the signal from each antenna and
automatically switches to the one with the better signal.
5. Configure the appropriate WLAN settings. Note that the configurable attributes and
available values are different for MC Network and S/5 Network.
72
2106778-002
Configuration
WLAN Client Configuration

Item Description Comments
Frequency Band Select the frequency band to be The WLAN radio is capable to communicate on
used with the WLAN radio: the following frequency bands, protocols and
- 2.4 GHzPass data rates:
- 5.1 GHz - 2.4 GHz, IEEE 802.11b, up to 11 Mbps.
- All Band (2.4 GHz & 5.1 GHz) - 2.4 GHz, IEEE 802.11g, up to 54 Mbps.
- 5.1 GHz, IEEE 802.11a, up to 54 Mbps.
NOTE: In the S/5 Wireless Network, the
frequency band is fixed to 2.4 GHz and it
supports 802.11b protocol only.
RTS Threshold Configure the RTS Threshold value. Use the default RTS Threshold value, unless
otherwise specified in the wireless network
design.
A valid RTS Threshold is a numeric value within
the range of 0 to 2347.
NOTE: This option is not configurable in the S/5
Wireless Network.
Fragmentation Configure the Fragmentation Fragmentation Threshold specifies the
Threshold Threshold value. maximum frame size a wireless device can
transmit without fragmenting the frame.
A valid Fragmentation Threshold is a numeric
value within the range of 256 to 2346.
Use the default Fragmentation Threshold value,
unless otherwise specified in the wireless
network design.
Wireless Network.
QoS Configuration Select the Quality of Service (QoS) Select QoS configuration setting as specified in
standard used in the wireless the wireless network design.
infrastructure to prioritize the NOTE: This option is not configurable in S/5
network traffic: Wireless Network.
- None (no QoS in use)
- WMM (WLAN Multimedia in use)
73
2106778-002

WMM AC Parameters Configure the WMM AC Parameters WLAN Multimedia (WMM) provide basic Quality
(CWmin, CWmax, AIFS, TXOP) for of Service (QoS) features to IEEE802.11 networks
each access category (voice, video, by prioritizing wireless network traffic according
best effort and background) if the to four Access Categories (AC) – voice, video,
QoS Configuration was selected as best effort and background.
WMM. Use the default WMM AC parameter values,
unless otherwise specified in the wireless
network design.
Valid values:
- CWmin: 3-1023
- CWmax: 7-1023
- AIFS: 0-20
- TXOP: 0-65536 (0 for Best Effort and
Background)
NOTE: The WMM AC parameters are
configurable only if the QoS Selection was
selected as WMM.
NOTE: The DSCP settings are configurable only if
the QoS Selection was selected as WMM.
NOTE: This option is not configurable in S/5
Wireless Network.
Wireless DSCP Configure the DSCP settings for the Valid DSCP ranges:
Settings following network traffic: Real Time Clinical Data 32 - 47
- Real Time Clinical Traffic (Waveforms, Parameters, etc.)
Non-Real time Clinical Data 0 - 7
- Non-Real time Clinical Traffic
(Trends, Full Disclosure, Printing, etc.)
- Non-Real-time Non-Clinical Non-Real-time Non-Clinical Data 8 - 23
Traffic (InSite, Service traffic, etc.)
DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)
settings provide Quality of Service (QoS) features
by prioritizing network traffic by traffic type. It
uses traffic classification by placing each data
packet into a limited number of traffic classes.
Use the default DSCP values, unless otherwise
specified in the wireless network design.
Note: For Non Real-Time Clinical Data traffic on
wireless, do not use DSCP values of 24-31. A risk
exists that Real-Time Clinical Data and Non
Real-Time Clinical Data will arrive at the same
QoS value in the wired network if proper DSCP to
DSCP mapping is not done at the wired to
wireless interface.
Wireless Network.
74
2106778-002
Configuration

SSID Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID), The SSID of the wireless client must match the
also known as network name. SSID of the wireless infrastructure.
A valid SSID includes up to 32 case-sensitive
ASCII characters, including space (ASCII decimal
32 to 126).
Confidentiality Select the Confidentiality (Data The confidentiality method of the wireless client
Privacy) method to be used: must match the confidentiality method of the
- None wireless infrastructure.
- WEP (64-bit) NOTE: The authentication method used with
WEP is Open System Authentication.
- WEP (128-bit)
NOTE: The wireless MC Network supports only
- WPA-PSK (TKIP)
confidentiality methods “None”, “WEP (128-bit)”,
- WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP) "WPA-PSK (TKIP)" and "WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)"
NOTE: The S/5 Wireless Network supports only
confidentiality methods “None”, "WEP (64-bit)
and “WEP (128-bit)”.
Key Index Select the Key Index to be used. The Key Index of the wireless client must match
the Key Index of the wireless infrastructure.
NOTE: The Key Index is selectable only if the

confidentiality method selected is “WEP (64-bit)”
or “WEP (128 bit)”.
Pass Phrase / Key Select the Pass Phrase / Key Format: Select the format of entering a Pass Phrase /
Format - ASCII Key Format.
- HEX
75
2106778-002

Pass Phrase / Key Enter the Pass Phrase / Key for the The Pass Phrase / Key of the wireless client must
used confidentiality method as an match the Pass Phrase / Key of the wireless
ASCII or HEX string as selected infrastructure.
above: A valid ASCII Pass Phrase / Key includes only
WEP (64-bit) / WEP (128-bit): printable ASCII characters, that is space and
- Enter a 5/13 character long ASCII ASCII decimals 32 to 126. However the following
string. The system will generate a ASCII decimals are not valid: 34 (" ), 36 ($ ), 39 (' ),
10/26 character hexadecimal 92 (\ ), and 96 (` ).
security key and assign it to the A valid HEX Pass Phrase / Key may include
currently selected Key Index. numeric characters 0-9 and alpha characters
OR A-F.
- Enter a 10/26 character long NOTE: A Pass Phrase / Key will be displayed as
hexadecimal (HEX) string. This 10 successive asterisk (*) characters, after it has
security key will be assigned for been saved.
the currently selected Key Index.
WPA-PSK (TKIP) and 
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
- Enter a 8 to 63 character long
(ASCII) string
OR
- Enter a 64 character long
hexadecimal (HEX) string
Confirm Pass Phrase Re-enter the Pass Phrase / Key
/ Key entered above.
6. Select Save to confirm the selections above.

If the WLAN Radio status is changed, all the WLAN configuration changes take effect on the
next monitor restart. If the WLAN Radio status is not changed, all the WLAN configuration
changes will take effect immediately.
7.2.5 Configuring ADT server settings

2. Select Configuration > Network > ADT settings.
3. In the ADT settings window, select Enable to enable the Visit Number Query.
4. Enter the ADT IX IP address.
NOTE: See section 7.2.2 Selecting and configuring CARESCAPE Network for a list of reserved
addresses that must not be used as the ADT IX IP address.
5. Select Save.
To disable the Visit Number Query, select Disable in the ADT settings window.
7.3 Setting time and date

NOTE: In the S/5 Network, the patient monitor’s date and time is automatically synchronized
with the date and time of the iCentral it is connected to. You can set the date and time locally
76
2106778-002
Configuration
only if the patient monitor is not connected to the S/5 Network and the patient monitor is in a
discharged state.
CAUTION NETWORK DEVICE TIME SYNCHRONIZATION — When adding a new device to
the CARESCAPE Network, the existing devices on the CARESCAPE Network will
synchronize to the new device’s time. To prevent potential time
synchronization issues, you should set the new device’s time to be as close as
possible to the time (within one minute or less) used by the existing GE devices
on the CARESCAPE Network.
2. Select Configuration > Time.
3. In the Time Configuration window, in Configure Date and Time, update the following
fields as needed:
• Date
• Month
• Year
• Hour:Minute
• AM/PM
• 12/24 Hrs
4. Select Save.
The manual time configuration takes effect immediately.
7.4 Setting unit and bed name

Configure the care unit name and bed name for patient monitors that are configured to
connect to the MC Network.
NOTE: The same unit name must be set for all the patient monitors and CARESCAPE Central
Stations (CSCS) that are connected to the same care unit in the MC Network. Bed name shall be
unique to each patient monitor in the same care unit.
NOTE: Unit and bed name selections are not available if network selection is S/5.
2. Select Configuration > Unit and Bed Name.
3. In the Unit and Bed Name Configuration window, view or set the unit name and bed
name for the device.
NOTE: Use only capital letters A - Z, numbers, dash (-), asterisk (*) and space ( ). The unit name
may be up to seven characters long and bed name up to five characters long.
4. Select Save.
The unit and bed name configuration takes effect immediately.
7.5 Configuring printers

You can configure the patient monitor to print to up to 12 laser printers connected on the IX
Network. Use the Webmin sub-modules to install or delete a printer and to print a test page.
NOTE: Ensure that you have the host name(s) or IP address(es) for all the connected IX printers
available. Configure the IX printers according to this information.
77
2106778-002
NOTE: Laser printers that are installed on central stations do not need to be configured using
Webmin. Refer to the user’s manual for details on configuring the printer.
NOTE: This Webmin module is available only if the monitor is equipped with the Advanced
Interface Board that provides both the MC and the IX Network interfaces.
NOTE: Refer to the patient monitor's supplemental information manual for the list of supported
devices.
7.5.1 Installing a printer

2. Select Configuration > Printers.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Printers menu, select Install Printer.
4. Below Printer Configuration Information in the Install Printer window, provide the
following information:
a. Select either the Hostname or IP Address radio button, as applicable.
b. In the Hostname or IP Address field, enter the printer Hostname or IP Address.
c. In the Printer Name field, enter the Printer Name.
d. Select Yes from the drop-down list next to Test Page.
5. Select Save.
6. From the patient monitor, select Monitor Setup > Printing.
7. Select the Devices > Setup.
8. In the Printout menu, select what to print out (for example, Waveforms, Alarm
Waveforms, Numeric Trends, Reports).
9. Below Location, select the radio button next to Network.
10. From the drop-down list next to Network Device, select the desired printer.
The change will take effect immediately.
7.5.2 Deleting a printer

NOTE: Before deleting a laser printer, check Monitor Setup > Printing > Devices > Status. If a
printout is assigned to the printer to be deleted, redirect the printout to another valid printer.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Printers menu, select Delete Printer.
4. In the Delete Printer window, select the printer to delete.
5. Select Save.
7.5.3 Printing a test page

3. In the Sub-Modules for Printers menu, select Print Test Page.
4. In the Print Test Page window, select the printer.
5. Select Save.
78
2106778-002
Configuration
7.6 Configuring MUSE/12SL

NOTE: MUSE viewing and the related configuration settings are available only if the monitor is
equipped with the Advanced Interface Board that provides both the MC and the IX Network
interfaces.
NOTE: MUSE viewing is a licensed software feature. You can configure the MUSE/12SL settings
independent of the license status, but actual viewing of MUSE reports requires that the
MuseView license is enabled.
Settings to send 12SL data

2. Select Configuration > MUSE/12SL.
3. In the MUSE/12SL window, enter the applicable information in the following fields:
- Location ID Identifies the location ID number (within the range 0 to 599)

associated with the patient monitor for searching the MUSE
system.
- Site Number Identifies the site number (within the range 1 to 254) associated
with the patient monitor for searching the MUSE system.
4. Select Save.
These settings take effect immediately after they are submitted.
Settings to view 12SL data

2. Select Configuration > MUSE/12SL.
3. In the MUSE/12SL window, enter the following:
- MUSE Web Username Username used to authenticate with the MUSE
Web to access 12-lead reports.
- MUSE Web Password Password used to authenticate with the MUSE
Web to access 12-lead reports.
- Confirm Password The password and the confirmed password must
be the same.
- MUSE Web URL Used to locate the MUSE Web system to access
12-lead reports. Enter the URL in a valid format.
4. Select Save.
These settings take effect immediately after they are submitted.
7.7 Admit settings

7.7.1 Patient ID prefix
The patient monitor will automatically generate a temporary, unique patient ID when a patient
with unknown ID is admitted to the patient monitor. The patient monitor will use this temporary
patient ID for all 12SL reports that are sent to MUSE until the patient is discharged from the
patient monitor, or his/her patient ID is changed. The temporary patient ID is generated from
the temporary patient ID prefix, care unit name, bed name, and current time.
79
2106778-002
The temporary patient ID prefix is a hospital defined prefix that is used as the first two
characters in a temporary patient ID to ensure its uniqueness inside the hospital.
2. Select Configuration > Admit Settings.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Admit Settings menu, select Patient ID Prefix.
4. In the Patient ID Prefix window, enter a 2-character prefix.
NOTE: Valid values are uppercase letters and numbers.
5. Select Save.
All changes take effect immediately.
7.7.2 Barcode settings

The barcode reader language configuration must match the host monitor keyboard locale
setting. As a default the barcode reader has been configured to US English at the factory.
Configure the correct language to the barcode reader itself first before you configure the
barcode settings to the monitor. Follow the instructions provided with the barcode reader.
Barcode settings must be configured if a barcode reader is used to input patient data to the
Admit/Discharge menu.
NOTE: Acquire detailed specification of the character-delimited or the length-delimited,
multi-field barcode that the hospital uses. This will configure the barcode parser correctly.
NOTE: Acquire sample barcodes, if possible, to verify the operation of the parser configuration.
NOTE: For details on barcode data requirements and restrictions, see section 7.7.5 Barcode
data specifications.
1. Select the parser type.
a. Log in to Webmin.
b. Select Configuration > Admit Settings.
c. In the Sub-Modules for Admit Settings window, select Barcode Settings.
d. Below Barcode Setup in the Barcode Settings window, select the applicable parser
type from the drop-down list:.
Parser type Used with this type of barcode
No Parser Simple barcode that contains one piece of
information, but no data control, so there is no
need for a parser.
Length Delimited Parser Barcode that specifies the beginning position and
length of each field on the barcode.
Character Delimited Parser Barcode that specifies a special character that
separates each field on the barcode.
2. Select Save.
If you selected No Parser, the barcode setting configuration is complete.
For a Length or Character Delimited Parser, follow the applicable instructions.
 7.7.3 Configuring length delimited parser information.
or
 7.7.4 Configure character delimited parser information.
80
2106778-002
Configuration
7.7.3 Configuring length delimited parser information

Points to note
 If you configure Age, you must either select the Age Unit item or one of the age units (e.g.,
Years, Months, Weeks, Days) below Fixed Option.
 If you configure Height, you must either select the Height Unit item or one of the height
units (e.g., Feet, Inches, Meters, Centimeters, Millimeters) below Fixed Option.
 If you configure Weight, you must either select the Weight Unit item or one of the weight
units (e.g., Kilograms, Grams, Micrograms, Pounds, Ounces) below Fixed Option.
 For an example of admit/discharge configuration for a length delimited parser, see
Example of length delimited parser information on page 81.
1. In the Admit/Discharge Configuration window, enter the location and length information
for each data item.
If an item is not included in the barcode, type 0 in the item’s Position and Length fields, or
leave the Position and Length fields blank.
a. In the Position column, type the beginning position of the field in the data string
(from 1 to 300).
b. In the Length column, type the number of characters (from 1 to 99) that the field
contains.
2. For Gender Format, select Fixed or Configured.
If you select Configured:
a. Type the character that identifies Male.
b. Type the character that identifies Female.
3. Below Fixed Option, select the applicable value:
Item Item selection in the top part of Fixed Option selection
the screen
Height Unit Both Height and Height Unit Non-Fixed.
Height only Select value from drop-down list.
Weight Unit Both Weight and Weight Unit Non-Fixed.
Weight only Select value from drop-down list.
Age Unit Both Age and Age Unit Non-Fixed.
Age only Select value from drop-down list.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the window, and select Save.

Example of length delimited parser information
In this example, the barcode contains 10 items. The following table lists the starting position
and length of each item.
Item Starting position Length
MRN 1 10
First Name 11 10
Last Name 21 15
Day of Birth 46 2
81
2106778-002
Item Starting position Length

Month of Birth 48 2
Year of Birth 50 4
Age 36 5
Age Unit 41 5
Gender 54 1
Height 55 5
The following sample shows the corresponding entries in the Admit/Discharge Configuration
window.
82
2106778-002
Configuration
7.7.4 Configure character delimited parser information

Points to note
 If you configure Age, you must either select the Age Unit item or one of the age units (e.g.,
Years, Months, Weeks, Days) below Fixed Option.
 If you configure Height, you must either select the Height Unit item or one of the height
units (e.g., Feet, Inches, Meters, Centimeters, Millimeters) below Fixed Option.
 If you configure Weight, you must either select the Weight Unit item or one of the weight
units (e.g., Kilograms, Grams, Micrograms, Pounds, Ounces) below Fixed Option.
 For an example of admit/discharge configuration for a length delimited parser, see
Example of character delimited parser information entry on page 83.
1. In the Position column of the Admit/Discharge Configuration window, enter the
sequence number of each item included in the barcode. Use incremental numbers from 1
(the left-most field) up to 16 (the right-most field).
If an item is not included in the barcode, leave the Position field blank for the item.
2. Below Field Delimiter, in the Delimiter field, enter the special character that separates
the fields on the barcode.
NOTE: Allowed characters are ASCII characters 33-126.
NOTE: Forbidden characters are control characters (ASCII characters 0-31), the space
character (ASCII character 32), and ASCII characters 127 and above.
NOTE: If the character selected exists in any field in the barcode, it will be misinterpreted as a
field delimiter.
3. Below Gender Code, enter the codes that identify Male and Female.
4. Below Fixed Option, select the applicable value:
Item Item selection in the top Fixed Option selection
part of the screen
Height Unit Both Height and Height Unit Non-Fixed.
Height only Select value from drop-down list.
Weight Unit Both Weight and Weight Unit Non-Fixed.
Weight only Select value from drop-down list.
Age Unit Both Age and Age Unit Non-Fixed.
Age only Select value from drop-down list.
5. Scroll to the bottom of the window, and select Save.

Example of character delimited parser information entry
In the following example, the barcode contains 12 items and uses the pound sign (#) as a
delimiter.
Item Sequence number of the item in the
barcode
MRN 4
First Name 5
Last Name 6
83
2106778-002
Item Sequence number of the item in the

barcode
Day of Birth 1
Month of Birth 2
Year of Birth 3
Age 11
Age Unit 12
Gender 7
Height 8
Height Unit 9
Weight 10
The following sample shows the corresponding entries in the Admit/Discharge Configuration
window.
84
2106778-002
Configuration
7.7.5 Barcode data specifications

Points to note
 The maximum length of the entire barcode is 300.
 If the field value is longer than the maximum length indicated, the right-most characters
will be truncated when the value is displayed in the Admit/Discharge menu.
If a field contains a forbidden character, that character will be replaced with a space
when it is displayed in the Admit/Discharge menu.
85
2106778-002
Item Maximum Valid entries Comments

length
MRN 99 Both letters and numbers Forbidden characters are those that are not
allowed by the patient monitor, including the
First Name 99
following characters:
Last Name 99 ! " # ¤ % & /( ) = ? ` @ £ $ € { [ ] } \ * ^ _ : ; | < >
Day of Birth 2 1-31 If Day of Birth is present in the barcode, then
Month of Birth and Year of Birth also need to
be present.
Month of Birth 2 1-12 If Month of Birth is present in the barcode,
then Day of Birth and Year of Birth also need
to be present.
Year of Birth 4 1880 to current year If Year of Birth is present in the barcode, then
Day of Birth and Month of Birth also need to
be present.
Age 99 Numeric 9999.9999 Either a period or comma is accepted as a
decimal symbol.
Age Unit 99 A, Y, YR, YRS (years)
MO, MOS (months)
WK, WKS (weeks)
D, DAY, DYS (days)
Gender 1 If gender is configured (not fixed), this must
be 1 character.
Height 99 Numeric 9999.9999 Either a period or comma is accepted as a
decimal symbol.
Height Unit 99 FT (feet)
IN (inches)
M (meters)
CM (centimeters)
MM (millimeters)
Weight 99 Numeric 9999.9999 Either a period or comma is accepted as a
decimal symbol.
Weight Unit 99 KG, KGS (kilograms)
G, GM, GMS (grams)
MCG (micrograms)
OZ, OZS (ounces)
LB, LBS (pounds)
Visit Number 99 Both letters and numbers Forbidden characters are those that are not
allowed by the patient monitor, including the
Primary Physician 99
following characters:
Referring Physician 99 ! " # ¤ % & /( ) = ? ` @ £ $ € { [ ] } \ * ^ _ : ; | < >
7.8 Setting power frequency

WARNING Incorrect power line frequency setting could adversely affect ECG and EEG
processing.
86
2106778-002
Configuration
2. Select Configuration > Power Frequency.
3. In the Power Frequency window, select the applicable power line frequency.
4. Select Save.
The power frequency configuration takes effect immediately.
7.9 Selecting language and locale

Select the language used in clinical user interface and select the keyboard locale setting for the
alphanumeric keyboard and the barcode reader.
2. Select Configuration >Language.
3. In the Language window, select the patient monitor language and keyboard language:
a. Select the patient monitor language from the drop-down list and select Save.
b. Select the keyboard locale from the drop-down list and select Save.
The language takes effect after the patient monitor is restarted. The keyboard locale takes
effect immediately after it is submitted.
7.10 Selecting national requirements

Activate France specific defaults for the ECG HR adjustment range and the reminder beep
behavior.
2. Select Configuration > National Requirements.
3. In the National Requirement window, select the applicable option:
Value Description
None Select the normal defaults.
France Enable the following country specific monitoring:
- Heart Rate high alarm limit maximum 230.
- Reminder beep will sound every 2 minutes when alarms have
been silenced permanently.
4. Select Save.
The national requirements changes take effect immediately.
7.11 Configuring modules

You can configure some acquisition module specific settings. The settings are saved to the
permanent memory of the related acquisition module and the settings travel with the module
from one patient monitor to another.
These settings are pre-configured at factory, except the Assets Settings. You may need to
re-configure them after corrective maintenance, or for administration purposes.
Refer to the Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for detailed information on how to
change these settings.
87
2106778-002
Webmin Module Description

sub-module
Assets Settings PDM This setting allows you to view the customer
assigned asset number of the PDM.
Licensing PDM This setting allows you to manage the PDM
feature licenses.
ECG Filter PDM This setting allows you to temporarily
Configuration disable the ECG filter of the PDM.
STP/TP/ST Settings E-PSMP This setting allows you configure the
STP/TP/ST setting after replacing the STP
board.
P/PT/PP Settings E-PT & E-PP This setting allows you to configure the
P/PT/PP setting after replacing the STP
board.
7.11.1 Module asset settings

NOTE: This configuration applies only to the PDM.
NOTE: The Device Serial Number field is view only and cannot be changed.
To set the device asset number of a PDM:
2. Select Configuration > Modules.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Modules menu, select Assets Settings.
4. In the Assets Settings window, enter the user-assigned asset number for the device in
the Change Value to column.
5. Select Save.
7.12 Setting the host asset number

Enter a host asset number and view the host serial number.
NOTE: The Host Serial Number field is view only and cannot be changed.
To set the host asset number:
2. Select Configuration > Host Asset Settings.
3. In the Host Asset Settings window, enter the user-assigned host asset number (up to 32
ASCII characters long) in the Change Value to column.
4. Select Save.
The host asset changes take effect immediately.
88
2106778-002
Configuration
7.13 Password management

7.13.1 User accounts and passwords
The following table lists the available user names and default passwords for accessing the
clinical configuration, service interface, and service calibrations.
User name Default password Access rights Password change
biomed Change Me Use this user account to Password change in
access service interface service interface is
and service calibrations: possible for the following
user accounts:
• Monitor Setup >
Service • biomed
• Monitor Setup > • clinical
Service Calibrations
clinical Change Me Use this user account to Clinical user can change
access password protected the default password for
clinical configurations: the clinical user account in
the clinical interface:
• Monitor Setup >
Default Setup • Monitor Setup >
See the user’s manual and Default Setup
supplemental information
manual for more
information.
For information on passwords related to other user accounts, contact GE service.
7.13.2 Changing passwords

You can change the passwords for the biomed and clinical users.
WARNING Control of this user’s password is critical to ensure that Webmin on this
device is accessed only by trained and authorized personnel. Failure to limit
access of Webmin to trained and authorized personnel only may
compromise patient safety and/or system performance.
NOTE: Username and password are case sensitive. The allowed characters for "biomed" and
"clinical" passwords are: alpha [A-Z, a-z], numeric [0-9], and space. The password length shall
be between 8 and 16 characters.
NOTE: The user name "biomed" is common for the Webmin and Service Calibrations login
screens. A change to the "biomed" password will affect both service interfaces.
2. Select Configuration > Passwords.
3. In the Edit User Password window, change the biomed or clinical user’s password as
required.
4. Select Save.
89
2106778-002
7.13.3 Resetting the password

If the valid password for the biomed user account is forgotten, contact your local GE
representative to request a password reset key.
Provide the following information when requesting a password reset key:
• serial number of the monitor
When you have received the password reset key:
1. Go to the service interface login screen.
2. Select Forgot password?.
The selection appears on the login screen after an invalid login.
3. Enter the received Reset Key.
4. Enter the received Expiration Date for the reset key in the following format: DDMMYYYY
5. Select Reset Password.
The biomed user account is now reset to default settings. For more information, see
section 7.13.1 User accounts and passwords.
7.14 Restarting the patient monitor

You can use the Restart module in Webmin to restart the patient monitor after making
configuration changes that require a manual restart to come into effect. For example after
changing network or language settings, or adding activation codes for licenses.
NOTE: Loss of monitoring - This function is enabled only when the patient monitor is in a
discharged state. Before restarting the patient monitor, verify that the patient is discharged
from the patient monitor.
2. Select Configuration > Restart.
3. In the Monitor Restart window, select Restart.
The patient monitor will shut down and restart automatically.
7.15 Setting up the remote service

7.15.1 Configuring the remote service
NOTE: Only available if the patient monitor is equipped with the Advanced Interface Board that
provides both the MC and the IX Network interfaces.
To configure the InSite RSvP remote service tool.
2. Select Configuration > Remote Service.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Remote Service menu, select Configuration.
90
2106778-002
Configuration
4. In the Remote Service Configuration window, enter the applicable data:

HTTP Proxy Server Configuration
Address - If this site uses an HTTP proxy server, a These values are
specific site proxy server IP Address and determined by the
Port
Port number are required for the customer.
Username and Remote Service communication to
Password work. Otherwise, select None.
- If the HTTP proxy server requires user
authorization, a specific Username, and
Password is required. Otherwise, select
None.
Remote Service Configuration

System ID Identifies the system to the GE back office These values are read-only
servers. and are unique.
Serial Number Identifies the unit and is set at the time of
manufacture.
Enterprise URL If required, designate the address of the GE This address should never
backoffice servers required to be changed unless explicit
communicate with the Remote Service instructions are given to do
Agent. so.
Enterprise Tunnel If required, designate the address of the GE
URL backoffice servers required to
communicate with the tunneling agent.
Protocol Identifies the protocol used to This field is read-only and
communicate with the enterprise servers. cannot be changed.
5. Select Save.
The changes will take effect immediately.
7.15.2 Enabling remote service agent/ connection

After the server has been configured for remote serviceability, the remote service agent must
be enabled for use.
2. Select Configuration > Remote Service.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Remote Service menu, select Control.
4. In the Remote Service Control window, enable or disable the Service Agent by selecting
Enable or Disable.
5. Select Save.
The changes will take effect immediately.
91
2106778-002
7.16 Transferring settings from one patient monitor to

other patient monitors
You can transfer platform and/or clinical settings from one patient monitor to another, take
backup copies of the settings to an external device and restore the settings from an external
device.
1. Complete the platform and/or clinical configuration in one patient monitor.
2. Save the completed platform and/or clinical configuration settings to an external device
(section 7.16.1 Saving settings).
3. Load the saved platform and/or clinical configuration settings from an external device to
the destination patient monitors (section 7.16.2 Loading settings).
4. Activate the loaded platform and/or clinical configuration settings in the destination
patient monitors (section 7.16.3 Activating settings).
5. Some platform settings can't be transferred from one patient monitor to another. See
section 7.16.3 Activating settings for details. Configure these unaffected settings
manually in the destination patient monitor following the instructions in sections 7.2
Configuring the network, 7.4 Setting unit and bed name, 7.12 Setting the host asset
number and 7.17 License management.
NOTE: Clinical settings are software package and profile specific. For example, you can transfer
clinical settings from a patient monitor with OR and PACU software only to other patient
monitors with OR and/or PACU software, not to patient monitors with ICU, NICU and ED
software.
7.16.1 Saving settings

NOTE: The patient monitor must not be configured to receive any alarm notifications from
other monitors when the settings are saved.
Before saving the settings to a patient monitor that is connected to the MC or S/5 Network,
make sure that the monitor is not receiving any alarm notifications from other monitors:
1. Select Data&Pages > Other Patients > Receive Alarms.
2. Check that Change All Notifications is set to Off.
Save the completed platform and/or clinical settings to a service PC or USB flash drive.
2. Select Configuration > Settings.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Settings menu, select Save.
4. In the Save Settings window, select the radio button next to the type of settings you want
to save.
5. Select Save.
6. According to your Webmin access:
a. If you are using Webmin on a service PC, you can save the settings file to any mass
storage device connected to the service PC:
 In the File Download dialog box, select Save.
 In the Save as dialog box, select the destination drive and folder and select Save.
NOTE: You may change the default filename, but do not change the file extension.
b. If you are using Webmin locally through the integrated browser, you can save the settings
file to a USB flash drive that is connected to one of the patient monitor’s USB ports:
92
2106778-002
Configuration
 The Save As window will show you the name of the created settings file.
 Select Save to save the settings file to the USB flash drive.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the USB storage device until saving is complete.
NOTE: As a factory default the ICU software package is always activated.
7.16.2 Loading settings

Load the saved platform and/or clinical settings from a service PC or USB flash drive to the
patient monitor.
NOTE: The loaded settings will remain in an inactive state in the patient monitor until they are
purposely activated by the user (see section”7.16.3 Activating settings”).
3. In the Sub-Modules for Settings menu, select Load.
a. If you are using Webmin on a service PC, you can load the settings file from any mass
storage device connected to the service PC:
 In the Load Settings window, enter the file name or select Browse to select a file
from the Choose File to Upload dialog box.
 Select Upload to load the settings.
b. If you are using Webmin locally through the integrated browser, you can load the settings
file from a USB flash drive that is connected to one of the patient monitor’s USB ports:
 The Load Settings window will show you the available settings files. Select the
settings file to be loaded.
 Select Load Settings to load the selected settings file from the USB flash drive.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the USB storage device until loading is complete.
7.16.3 Activating settings

NOTE: Settings activation takes place only when the patient monitor is in a case reset / patient
discharged state. If you are going to activate settings immediately, verify that the patient
monitor is in a case reset / patient discharged state. You can alternatively initiate the setting
activation process with a delay during an active patient case, but the new settings will activate
only after the next case reset / patient discharged.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Settings menu, select Activate.
4. In the Activate Settings window, select the settings that you want to activate:
93
2106778-002
• Select Cloned settings (clinical and platform) to activate both the clinical and
platform settings.
• Select Cloned clinical settings to activate only loaded clinical settings.
• Select Cloned platform settings to activate only loaded platform settings.
NOTE: Activation of the cloned clinical or platform settings will not affect the following
settings in the target patient monitor:
 Network
 Unit and Bed Name
 Host Asset Settings
 Licenses
Remember to configure the unaffected settings manually in the target patient monitor.
NOTE: Check and manually modify the following WLAN settings after activating them in
the destination monitor:
 RTS Threshold
 Fragmentation Threshold
 TXOP for Best Effort
 TXOP for Background
• Select Factory default settings to restore all platform and clinical settings back to
the factory defaults.
• Select US default clinical settings to restore all clinical and platform settings back
to the US specific factory defaults.
NOTE: Activation of the factory defaults and US factory defaults will leave the following
settings in the target patient monitor unaffected:
- Host Asset Settings
- Licenses
5. In the Setting Activation, select whether you want the new settings to take effect
immediately or after the next case end / discharge:
94
2106778-002
Configuration
Select To NOTE
Immediately Activate the new settings The patient monitor must be in a
Immediately. case reset / patient discharged state.
After next case end / Take the new settings in use This option allows you to initiate the
discharge with a delay, after the next setting activation process with a
case end / patient discharge. delay during an active patient case.
The new settings will activate only
after the next case end / patient
discharge.
6. Select Activate to start the settings activation process.

• If immediate settings activation was selected:
a. Wait until the settings activation is completed and the patient monitor has
performed an automatic restart.
b. Verify that the settings activation was successful and the patient monitor is running
the activated settings.
• If after next case end / discharge settings activation was selected:
a. The patient monitor will show a message Settings activation on next
discharge/after next case end on the display until the next case end / patient
discharge. The patient monitoring can be continued normally until then.
b. Settings activation will start automatically after the next case end / patient
discharge, unless this process is canceled by the user.
c. Wait until the settings activation is completed and the patient monitor has
performed an automatic restart.
d. Verify that the settings activation was successful and the patient monitor is running
the activated settings.
7.16.4 Canceling pending settings activation

You can cancel pending settings activation anytime while the message Setting activation
after next case end / Setting activation after next discharge is shown on the display.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Settings menu, select Activate.
4. Select Cancel to cancel settings activation.
95
2106778-002
7.17 License management

You can upload a license file that contains all acquired licenses and activation codes.
Alternatively, you can enable and activate individual software packages and host software
feature licenses by entering the required activation code manually.
NOTE: Contact GE Healthcare to acquire activation codes for licenses.
7.17.1 Enabling and activating host software package

NOTE: As a factory default the ICU software package is always activated.
NOTE: You can have several software packages enabled, but only one of them can be selected
active at a time.
Enter an activation code to enable the software package.
2. Select Configuration > Licenses.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Licenses window, select Software Package.
4. Below Software Package in the Software Package window:
a. From the Status drop-down list, select ENABLED.
b. Enter a valid Activation Code for the new software version.
5. Select Save.
6. To activate a software package, select the desired radio button in the Active column.
7. Select Save.
All license changes take effect after the next patient monitor restart.
NOTE: The software license for the active host software version is shown in the Software
Package window below the Active Software License. This license is typically entered before
activating a new host software version, see Software Management.
WARNING If the software package is changed, all clinical settings will reset to factory
defaults.
7.17.2 Enabling and activating host software feature licenses

Feature licenses are available either as permanent or as trial licenses. Activation codes for trial
licenses are valid for 90-days.
Enter the activation code to enable a software feature.
3. In the Sub-Modules for Licenses menu, select Host Licensing.
4. In the Host License window, enter the activation code by the appropriate OPTIONAL host
license feature.
NOTE: To activate an OPTIONAL-TRIAL license, enter the expiration date in addition to the
activation code.
5. From the Status drop-down list, select ENABLED.
6. Select Save.
96
2106778-002
Configuration
7.17.3 Uploading license file

Upload a valid license file as follows:
3. In the Sub-Modules for Licenses window, select Upload License.
a. If you are using Webmin on a service PC, you can upload the license file from any
mass storage device connected to the service PC. In the Upload Software Package
and Host License window, enter the file name of the license file or select Browse to
select a file using the Choose File to Upload dialog box.
b. If you are using Webmin locally through the integrated browser, you can upload the
license file from a USB flash drive that is connected to one of the patient monitor’s
USB ports. In the Upload Software Package and Host License window, select the
license file to be uploaded.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the USB storage device until downloading is complete.
5. Select Upload to upload the license file.
6. Verify that the information populated in the Software Package and Host License tables is
accurate.
7.18 Certificate management

HTTPS protocol is used for secure communication between the monitor and the service PC
using the Webmin web client. The purpose for using HTTPS protocol is to authenticate the
connected monitor and to protect the privacy and integrity of the exchanged data between the
monitor and the Webmin web client.
Certificate Management is used to configure the Webmin web client with an X.509 certificate
from a trusted certificate authority. The monitor’s service interface provides tools to install a
custom certificate and a public key to the monitor, but first you need to use third party tools or
services to generate them.
By factory default, the monitor has a self-signed certificate of the Webmin web client issued by
GE. To improve access security, you can install a certificate issued and signed by a trusted
certificate authority to the monitor. The certificate authority must be recognized and trusted by
the web browsers used to access the service interface.
7.18.1 Generating a certificate and a private key

2. Select Configuration > Certificate management > Generate Self Signed Certificate and
Key.
3. In the Certificate Manager: Generate Self Signed Certificate and Key window, enter the
• Certificate file name: Enter the file name for the certificate file (default:
hostcert.pem).
• Key file name: Enter the file name for the private key file (default: hostkey.pem).
• Key/Certificate pair file name: Enter the file name for the private key/certificate file
(default: hostkey+cert.pem).
• Password: Enter the password for the private key/certificate.
97
2106778-002
• Confirm Password: Re-enter the password for the private key/certificate. NOTE. You
must enter the password each time that an SSL service that uses this key is started.
If you do not want to provide the password for each service, leave the Password
field blank.
• Key size: Enter the RSA key size in bits (default: 2048).
• Certificate valid for: Enter the number of days before the certificate expires (default:
730)
• Common Name: Enter the name of the host device (default: hostname of the
device).
• Organization Name: Enter the name of the hospital requesting the certificate/key.
• Locality: Enter the locality information (for example, city).
• State or Province (full name): Enter the state or province information.
• Country: Enter the 2-letter country code.
• Email Address: Enter the email address of the hospital requesting the
certificate/key.
4. Select Generate Key to generate a self-signed certificate and private key.
7.18.2 Generating a certificate signing request (CSR)

2. Select Configuration > Certificate management > Generate Self Signed Certificate and
Key.
3. In the Certificate Manager: Generate Certificate Signing Request window, enter the
• Certificate file name: Enter the file name for the certificate file (default:
hostsct.pem).
• Key file name: Enter the file name for the private key file (default: hostkey.pem).
• Password: Enter the password for the private key/certificate.
• Confirm Password: Re-enter the password for the private key/certificate. NOTE. You
must enter the password each time that an SSL service that uses this key is started.
If you do not want to provide the password for each service, leave the Password
field blank.
• Key size: Enter the RSA key size in bits (default: 2048).
• Common Name: Enter the name of the host device (default: hostname of the
device).
• Organization Name: Enter the name of the hospital requesting the SSL and CSR.
• Locality: Enter the locality information (for example, city).
• State or Province (full name): Enter the state or province information.
• Country: Enter the 2-letter country code.
• Email Address: Enter the email address of the hospital requesting the SSL and CSR.
4. Select Generate CSR to request an authenticated certificate from a Certificate Authority
(CA).
7.18.3 Importing the certificate and the private key

NOTE: The certificate and the private key must be in a PEM-encoded file format, which is
readable as ASCII text. Importing encrypted private keys is not supported.
98
2106778-002
Configuration
2. Select Configuration > Certificate management > Import Key or Signed Certificate.
3. To upload the certificate file:
a. In the Certificate file to upload field, select Choose file, search the drive and folder
where the file is located, and select the file you wish to upload. Follow the
instructions of the web browser.
b. In the Destination directory of certificate field, select the destination directory for
uploading the certificate file.
c. Enter the name of the certificate to the Destination filename of certificate field.
d. Select Upload Certificate to upload the certificate file to the host device.
4. To upload the key file:
a. In the Key file to upload field, select Choose file. Search for the drive and folder
where the file is located and select the file you wish to upload. Follow the
instructions of the web browser.
b. In the Destination directory of key field, select the destination directory for
uploading the private key file.
c. In the Destination filename of certificate field, enter the name of the private key.
d. Select Upload Key to upload the private key file to the host device.
7.18.4 Managing the current certificate or private key

2. Select Configuration > Certificate management > Manage/view installed certificates
and keys.
3. Select the certificate or key file in the drop-down list and select View.
• To download the certificate or key file, select Download. NOTE: The download
certificate or key file is not encrypted. To encrypt the file, enter a password in the
field below the certificate/key table and select Download As PKCS12, With
Password. This password is user-selectable.
• To delete the certificate or key file, select Delete.
7.18.5 Managing the Webmin certificate or key

2. Select Configuration > Certificate management > Webmin Certificate.
3. In the drop-down list, select the certificate file and Select. The certificate file must also
contain the unencrypted key.
• To enable the selected certificate or key file, select Set.
• To reset the selected certificate or key file, select Reset.
NOTE: The service interface can become unresponsive after a new certificate is uploaded.
If necessary, reload the page or reopen the browser after uploading the certificate.
7.19 Software management

Software installation consists of two main steps: software transfer and software activation.
7.19.1 Transferring the software

To begin the software installation, transfer the new software into the inactive memory partition
of the patient monitor. You can use either of the following tools:
99
2106778-002
• GE Healthcare Software Transfer Utility that runs on a service PC. With this application,
you can transfer new software to the patient monitors over the CARESCAPE Network IX (IX
Network) or a crossover cable.
• InSite RSvP
You can transfer the software in the background, without affecting normal patient monitoring.
The new, transferred software is inactive in the patient monitor(s) until you activate it.
NOTE: The software installation package contains both the patient monitor software and the
Software Transfer Utility. The software transfer procedure is described in detail in the
CARESCAPE Modular Monitors Software Installation Instructions that is delivered together with
the software installation package.
7.19.2 Activating the installed software

After transferring the new software to the patient monitors, take the transferred, inactive
software into use by activating it.
Before you start:
• Connect the patient monitor to the AC mains during software activation. Software
activation does not start if the patient monitor uses its battery.
• Verify the compatibility of the connected bedside and network devices with the new
software version. Refer to the latest version of the patient monitor's supplemental
information manual for a list of compatible network and bedside devices.
• Contact GE Healthcare to get the latest version of the user and service documentation.
• Contact GE Healthcare for any inquiries regarding the software installation package
and/or activation code for the new host software version.
NOTE: Loss of monitoring - Software is activated only when the patient monitor is in a patient
discharged / case reset state. Normal patient monitoring is unavailable until the software
activation is completed. This may take up to 10 minutes.
NOTE: The existing clinical and platform settings of the patient monitor are saved and are not
affected by the activation of the new patient monitor software version. However, any new or
changed clinical and platform settings in the activated patient monitor software version have
their factory default values and may require manual configuration. For more information, refer
to the latest version of the patient monitor's supplemental information manual.
2. Select Configuration > Software Management. 
The Software Management window displays.
3. In the Software List, select the software that you want to activate:
Software Purpose of use
Host Software Patient monitor software for the host unit including:
• UIC SW for the UI board
• EMBC SW for the CPU board
• PMC SW for the DC/DC board
LoFlo software E-LoFLo module
NMT software E-NMT module
Note: You can only upgrade to the E-NMT-01 version.
100
2106778-002
Configuration
Software Purpose of use

PDM Software CARESCAPE Patient Data Module
PiCCO Software E-PiCCO module
sGAS Software CARESCAPE respiratory modules: E-sCO, E-sCOV, E-sCOVX,
E-sCAiO, E-sCAiOV, E-sCAiOVX
4. Select Next.
The selected Software activation window appears.
5. According to the software you are activating, proceed to:
• Activating host software immediately
• Activating host software after next case end / discharge
• Activating module software
Activating host software immediately

Before you start:
• Make sure the patient monitor is in a case reset / patient discharged state.
1. In the Host Software window, verify that the software you are activating is listed as
Inactive in Current Software State.
2. In Software License, if applicable, enter the Activation Code for the new software
version.
101
2106778-002
3. In Software Activation, select Immediately.

4. In Erase Inactive Software After Activation, select:
No - to keep the currently active software version as inactive software after

the new software version is activated successfully. This option lets you
restore the patient monitor to the previous software version later.
Yes - to erase the currently active software version permanently after the
new software version is activated successfully.
5. Select Activate to start the host software activation.

6. Confirm activation by selecting Yes in the Host Software window that opens.

The patient monitor shows a screen saver that informs about the ongoing software
activation:
Software activation in progress. Do not disconnect any measurement modules or
other peripheral devices, or shut down the monitor until the software activation is
complete. Activation may take up to 10 minutes. The device will automatically restart
once the software activation is complete.
NOTE: When the software is activated first time after a uDOM replacement, the screen
saver does not appear.
7. Wait until the software activation completes and the patient monitor restarts
automatically.
8. Verify that the software activation is successful and the patient monitor runs the
activated software.
Activating host software after next case end / discharge

If you want to activate the new host software with a time delay, that is, after the next case end
/ patient discharge, follow this instruction. You can initiate the software activation process with
a delay during an active patient case.
102
2106778-002
Configuration
1. In the Host Software window, verify that the software that you activate is listed as
Inactive in Current Software State.
2. In Software License, if applicable, enter the Activation Code for the new software
version.
3. In Software Activation, select After next case end / discharge.
4. In Erase Inactive Software After Activation, select:
No - to keep the currently active software version as inactive software after

the new software version is activated successfully. This option lets you
restore the patient monitor to the previous software version later.
Yes - to erase the currently active software version permanently after the
new software version is successfully activated.
5. Select Activate to start the software activation.

The patient monitor shows a message Software activation after next case end / after
next discharge on the display until the next case end or patient discharge. The patient
monitoring can be continued normally until then.
7. Software activation will start automatically after the next case end / patient discharge,
unless this process is cancelled before it starts.
The patient monitor informs clinical users about pending software activation by showing the
message Software activation after next case end / after next discharge on the display.
103
2106778-002
The software activation starts automatically after the clinical user performs a patient
discharge / case end the next time. The patient monitor shows a screen saver that informs
about the ongoing software activation:
Software activation in progress. Do not disconnect any measurement modules or other
peripheral devices, or shut down the monitor until the software activation is complete.
Activation may take up to 10 minutes. The device will automatically restart once the
software activation is complete.
NOTE: When the software is activated first time after a uDOM replacement, the screen saver
does not appear.
The clinical user must wait until the software activation is complete and the patient monitor
restarts automatically. If the patient monitor starts up normally and no error messages appear
on the display, the activation is successful.
Activating module software

Follow this instruction when you want to:
• activate new sGAS software to a CARESCAPE Respiratory Module
• activate new PDM software to a CARESCAPE Patient Data Module
• activate new PiCCO software to an E-PiCCO Module
• activate new NMT software to an E-NMT Module (only possible for E-NMT-01 version)
• activate new LoFlo software to an E-LoFlo Module
Before you start:
• Make sure that the patient monitor is in a case reset / patient discharge state.
• Make sure that the target parameter module is connected to the patient monitor.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the parameter module, or shut down the patient monitor until the
software activation is completed and the parameter module has restarted.
NOTE: Do not activate the host software while the module software upgrade is in progress.
To activate module software:
1. In the PDM/sGAS/PiCCO/NMT/LoFlo Software window, in Current Software State, verify
that the software you want to activate is listed as Inactive.
2. Select Activate to activate the inactive software.
The patient monitor will now start activating the module software. It will show a message
PDM module removed or xxx measurement removed (xxx refers to parameter name) on
the patient monitor screen. This message will remain until the module software activation
is completed and the parameter module has restarted. This may take up to 15 minutes.
Do not shut down the patient monitor or disconnect the parameter modules. The
parameter module restarts automatically after the software activation is complete.
4. After the parameter module restarts, verify that the software activation is successful and
the parameter module runs the activated software.
7.19.3 Canceling pending host software activation

You can cancel a pending host software activation at any time while the message Software
activation after next discharge/after next case end is shown on the display.
The Software Management window opens.
104
2106778-002
Configuration
3. Select Host Software from the Software List and select Next.
4. In the Host Software window, below Status, verify that the Software activation pending
is Yes.
5. Select Cancel.
The pending software activation is cancelled and the patient monitor continues running the
current software version.
7.19.4 Erasing an inactive software version

You can erase an inactive host software version from the patient monitor. Erasing can prevent
the activation of a wrong software version by mistake.
The Software Management window opens.
3. Select the software that you want to erase and select Next. 
The selected software activation window appears.
4. Select Erase to erase the inactive software.
105
2106778-002
For your notes:
106
2106778-002
Installation checkout
8 Installation checkout
The purpose of the installation checkout procedure is to ensure that the system is properly
installed and configured for use.
The installation check covers the CARESCAPE B650 monitoring system including the following
devices:
• CARESCAPE B650 host
• Displays
• E-modules
• CARESCAPE PDM
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure for the monitoring system
after the hardware installation and platform configuration is completed:
• 8.1. Visual inspection
• 8.2. Electrical safety tests
NOTE: The manufacturer has performed the electrical safety test for the patient monitor
and acquisition modules during final inspection. You do not have to perform the electrical
safety tests during installation checkout, if there is less than 12 months since the patient
monitor was manufactured. Check the date of manufacture of the device from the device
label (see section 3.5.2. Equipment identification).
• 8.3. Functional check
NOTE: Refer to chapter 10. Maintenance and checkout to see the recommended checkout
procedure after corrective and planned maintenance.
8.1 Visual inspection

Perform the following visual inspection to the installed monitoring system:
• Carefully inspect the patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices for any
damage.
• Verify that the patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices are properly
mounted with specified mounting solutions.
• Verify that the cables between the patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices
are intact, properly connected and secured to the right connectors.
• Verify that the modules are properly connected and locked.
• Verify that the pivoting module frame and battery door are properly locked.
The cleaning precautions, requirements, procedures, and recommended cleaning solutions for
the patient monitor are described in the patient monitor’s user’s manual. For details about
cleaning, disinfecting and sterilizing the accessories, see the instructions for use in the
accessory package.
8.2 Electrical safety tests

Electrical safety tests provide a method of determining if potential electrical health hazards to
the patient or operator of the device exist.
107
2106778-002
8.2.1 Test setup

Test conditions
Perform electrical safety tests under normal ambient conditions of temperature, humidity and
pressure.
Test equipment
The test equipment required to perform electrical safety tests is listed below.
Tool Part Number / Requirement

Safety Analyzer / Leakage Current Tester Equivalent to the circuits shown.
Safety Test Body Kit 1) P/N M1155870 or equivalent
1 Instead of the test bodies included in the safety test body kit, other applicable test bodies
with all pins connected together may be used.
Perform electrical safety tests using an electrical safety analyzer according to IEC 60601-1,
AAMI ES60601-1 + C1 + A1 + A2, EN 60601-1 or CSA CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 60601-1:14. The
schematics in this section provide a general understanding of the test equipment. Actual
configuration of test equipment may vary. Refer to the instructions delivered with the safety
analyzer to perform each test.
The patient monitor being tested should be placed on an insulating surface.
NOTE: Before proceeding, make sure that all test equipment is properly calibrated, maintained
and functioning.
NOTE: GE recommends that the qualified personnel performing the tests should record the test
results of each electrical safety test, for example by using the installation / maintenance check
forms included in this manual.
System setup
These instructions are intended for every component in the system. Ensure that all system
components are properly connected to the patient monitor.
8.2.2 Power outlet

Verify that the power outlet is wired correctly according to the country’s electrical code
standard before starting the following electrical safety tests. The results of the following tests
will be inaccurate unless a properly wired power outlet is used.
8.2.3 Power cord and plug

Verify that the power cord being used with the patient monitor is good. To do this, check the
following:
• Inspect the power cord for wear or damage regularly. If damage is suspected, test for
continuity through each conductor of the power cord connector. Replace the power cord,
as necessary, with a regulatory approved cord for the country of use.
WARNING Use only AC power cords recommended or manufactured by GE.
108
2106778-002
8.2.4 Ground integrity check

Listed below are two alternative methods for checking the ground integrity: “a) Ground
continuity test” and “b) Impedance of protective ground connection”. These tests determine
whether the device's exposed metal and power inlet's ground connection has a power ground
fault condition.
Perform either test a) or test b) in accordance to your local regulations.
NOTE: Refer to the instructions delivered with the safety analyzer to perform each test.
a) Ground continuity test
The measuring device (MD) in the diagram below may be a digital multimeter or part of the
safety analyzer.
Acceptance criteria:
• For equipment without a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective
ground terminal and any accessible metal part which is protectively grounded shall not
exceed 0.1 ohms.
• For equipment with a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective ground
pin in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively grounded shall
not exceed 0.2 ohms.
b) Impedance of protective ground connection

This test is normally only required as a manufacturing production test to receive safety agency
compliance. Some country agencies do require this test after field equipment repairs (i.e.,
Germany’s DIN VDE 0751 standards). Consult your country/local safety agency if in doubt.
Check compliance as follows:
1. A current of 25A from a current source with a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz with a no-load

voltage not exceeding 6 V is passed for at least 5 seconds, but not more than 10 seconds,
through the protective earth terminal or the protective earth pin in the mains plug and
each accessible metal part which could become live in case of failure in basic insulation.
2. The voltage drop between the parts described is measured and the impedance
determined from the current and voltage drop. It shall not exceed the values indicated.

109
2106778-002
When taking this measurement, flex the unit’s power cord along its length. There should
be no fluctuations in resistance.
• For equipment without a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective
ground terminal and any accessible metal part which is protectively grounded shall not
exceed 0.1 Ohms.
• For equipment with a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective ground
pin in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively grounded shall
not exceed 0.2 Ohms.
8.2.5 Ground leakage current test

This test measures the current leakage flowing from the mains part through or across the
insulation into the protective ground conductor of the device under test.
Perform this test both in Normal Condition (NC) and in a Single Fault Condition (SFC), where one
of the supply conductors is open at a time. Perform the test with normal and reverse polarity.
NOTE: Refer to the instructions delivered with the safety analyzer to perform this test.
NOTE: *The measuring device (MD) represents the network and voltage measuring instrument
and its frequency characters according to IEC 60601-1.
1. Configure the safety analyzer as follows (NC):

 Polarity: NORMAL
 Neutral: CLOSED
2. Power on the device under test.
3. Read and record the current leakage indicated on the safety tester.
4. Configure the safety analyzer as follows (SFC):

 Neutral: OPEN
110
2106778-002

 Polarity: REVERSED
 Neutral: OPEN

 Neutral: CLOSED
10. Power off the device under test.
Acceptance criteria in Normal Condition (NC):

• All readings shall be less than or equal to 300 A for installations that require compliance
to UL 60601-1 requirements.
to EN 60601-1 / IEC 60601-1 requirements.
Acceptance criteria in Single Fault Condition (SFC) – one of the supply conductors open at a
time:
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 1 mA.
8.2.6 Testing touch current

This test measures current leakage through the exposed conductive parts on the device under
test.
Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) and in two different Single Fault Conditions (SFC):
1) earth open and 2) one of the supply conductors open at a time. Perform the test with normal
and reverse polarity.
111
2106778-002
and its frequency characters according to IEC 60601-1.

 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): CLOSED
2. Power on the device under test.

 Neutral: OPEN

 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): OPEN

 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): OPEN
112
2106778-002

 Neutral: OPEN

 Neutral: CLOSED
14. Power off the device under test.

• All readings shall be less than or equal to 100 A
Acceptance criteria in Single Fault Condition (SFC) – earth open or one of the supply conductors
open at a time:
to UL 60601-1 requirements.
to EN 60601-1 / IEC 60601-1 requirements.
8.2.7 Patient leakage current tests – overview

The following table specifies the parameter modules and the related patient connectors to be
tested in the 8.2.8. Patient (source) leakage current tests and in the 8.2.9. Patient (sink) leakage
current tests.
Use the safety test body kit, P/N M1155870 (or equivalent), to perform patient leakage current
tests. This safety test body kit contains various patient connectors where all pins are shorted
out together. For information on which test body to use for each patient connector, refer to the
service instructions included in the safety test body kit.
NOTE: If not otherwise stated in the table below, each test body is connected directly to the
specified connector in the patient module.
Table 1 Patient connectors to be tested with each module
Module Patient connector

E-PSMP ECG &
SpO2
E-PT P3/P7
E-PP P5
113
2106778-002
Module Patient connector

E-COP, E-COPSv P4/P8
E-PiCCO P8
E-NSATX, E-NSAT SpO2
E-Masimo SpO2
E-NMT NMT
E-BIS 1. Connect the BISx Digital Signal Processing Unit with the Patient
Interface Cable (PIC+) to the E-BIS module.
2. Connect the specified test body to the PIC+ cable.
NOTE: The patient isolation is in the BISx Digital Signal Processing
Unit, not in the E-BIS module.
E-Entropy 1. Connect an Entropy sensor cable to the module.
2. Connect the specified test body to the Entropy sensor cable.
E-EEG 1. Disconnect the N-EEG headbox from the E-EEG module.
2. Connect the test body directly to the E-EEG module.
PDM ECG &
SpO2
8.2.8 Patient (source) leakage current tests

This procedure measures the leakage current from an applied part connector of the device to
ground.
Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) and in two different Single Fault Conditions (SFC):
1) earth open and 2) one of the supply conductors open at a time. 
Perform test with normal and reverse polarity.
and its frequency characters according to IEC 60601-1.
114
2106778-002
NOTE: Perform this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors
specified in Table 1.

 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): CLOSED
2. Power on the device under test.
3. Read and record the current leakage indicated on the safety tester.
 Neutral: OPEN
 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): OPEN
 Neutral: CLOSED
 Earth (GND): OPEN
 Neutral: OPEN
 Neutral: CLOSED
15. Repeat this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors

• All readings shall be less than or equal to 10 A.
Acceptance criteria in Single Fault Condition (SFC) – earth open or one of the supply conductors
open at a time:
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 50 A. 
115
2106778-002
8.2.9 Patient (sink) leakage current tests

This procedure measures the leakage current from an applied part connector of the device to
ground. Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) with normal and reverse polarity.
and its frequency characters according to IEC 60601-1.
NOTE: **According to IEC-60601, the impedance to protect the circuitry and the person
performing the test, but low enough to accept currents higher than the allowable values of the
leakage current to be measured.
WARNING SHOCK HAZARD - The following step causes high voltage at the test body.
Do not touch the test body.
NOTE: Perform this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors
specified in Table 1.
1. Configure the safety analyzer as follows:

 Neutral: CLOSED
 GND: CLOSED
2. Power on the device under test.
4. Configure the safety analyzer as follows:
 Neutral: CLOSED
 GND: CLOSED
116
2106778-002
7. Repeat this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 50 A.
8.2.10 Test completion

1. Disconnect the safety analyzer from the power outlet.
2. Disconnect the test equipment from the patient monitor.
3. Disconnect the patient monitor’s power cord from the leakage tester.
4. Mark this task as complete on the Appendix A. Installation check form.
8.3 Functional check

The purpose of this functional check is to ensure that the system is properly installed and
configured. Cover all peripheral devices that are connected to the patient monitor by
performing the applicable tests below. Skip the tests that are not applicable for the installed
patient monitor.
8.3.1 Start-up
1. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
2. Turn on the patient monitor and perform a cold start.
NOTE: The patient monitor performs a cold start, when the monitor has been off for more than
15 minutes. You can force the patient monitor to perform a cold start earlier by detaching the
monitor battery and disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet for a moment before
turning the monitor on.
Verify that the patient monitor starts up normally:
 The yellow, red and blue alarm lights are lit momentarily.
 The speaker gives an audible beep.
 The normal monitoring screen appears and there are no error messages on the
screen.
 Monitors with battery option: The battery symbol on the upper right corner of the
screen indicates that the monitor battery is fully charged or charging.
NOTE: Before taking the patient monitor into use for the first time, the battery should be fully
charged. Keep the monitor connected to the mains until the battery is fully charged.
NOTE: Refer to section 10.4. Monitor battery maintenance to see the procedure for battery
conditioning and battery replacement, if you receive a Battery Failure message.
8.3.2 Display
Picture quality
Perform this test both for the integrated main display and for the optional secondary display.
1. Verify that all text is readable and all images are clear.
2. Verify that the brightness is good. Adjust if necessary.
117
2106778-002
Touchscreen control
Perform this test only if the integrated main display or the optional secondary display is a
touchscreen.
1. Verify the operation and the calibration of a touchscreen by touching a corner of an
active parameter window. Verify that the selected menu is opened.
2. Select to close any open menu and return to the main display.
8.3.3 Device Information

2. Select Information > Device Information.
3. Verify that the device information is correct:
 The connected parameter modules are identified.
 The connected CARESCAPE Network ID interfaces are identified.
 The connected USB input devices are identified.
4. Stay connected to Webmin.
8.3.4 Configuration Information

1. Select Information > Configuration Information.
2. Verify that the patient monitor is correctly configured:
 The host Information is correct.
 The active software package is correct.
 The correct host licenses are enabled.
 The correct PDM licenses are enabled.
 Patient ID prefix is correctly configured.
 Unit and Bed name are correctly configured.
 S/5 printers are correctly configured.
 IX printers and printer locations are correctly configured.
 Remote service is correctly configured.
 National requirements are correctly configured.
 Network is correctly configured.
 Power Line Frequency is correctly configured.
 MUSE/12SL is correctly configured.
 WLAN is correctly configured.
3. Log out Webmin.
8.3.5 Trim knob, secondary display, and remote

Perform this test for the optional secondary display, trim knob, and for the optional remote
controller.
1. Press any key on the touchscreen or remote, and verify that the selected menu is opened
on the screen or the selected activity is started.
2. Rotate the Trim Knob control in either direction to move from option to option on the
display until you have an active parameter window or main menu item highlighted. Press
118
2106778-002
the Trim Knob control once to select the highlighted option. Verify that the selected
menu is opened on the screen or the selected activity is started.
3. Select to close any open menu and return to the main display.
8.3.6 Mouse
Perform this test only if a mouse is connected to the patient monitor.
1. Move the mouse until the pointer (arrow) is over an active parameter window or a main
menu item you wish to select and click the left mouse button once to select it.
2. Select to close the open menu and return to the main display.
8.3.7 Alphanumeric keyboard

Perform this test only if an alphanumeric keyboard is connected to the patient monitor.
1. Select Data & Pages > Admit/Discharge (or Start / End Case).
2. Select the Patient tab > Edit Name & MRN.
3. Press Enter to highlight the Medical Record Number field.
4. Type some text into the Medical Record Number field using the connected alphanumeric
keyboard. Include some characters that are specific to the chosen keyboard locale to
verify that the keyboard language configuration is correct.
8.3.8 Barcode reader

Perform this test only if a barcode reader is connected to the patient monitor.
1. Select Data & Pages > Admit/Discharge (or Start / End Case).
2. Select the Patient tab.
3. Scan a test barcode that is applicable to your system:
Parser Type Test Procedure

Length Delimited or Character 4. Select Scan from Barcode.
Delimited Parser 5. Scan a known test barcode obtained from the hospital. 
1. NOTE: The barcode data content must be known and in
2. compliance with the completed parser configuration.
3. 6. Verify that the data content in the barcode is correctly
populated to the related fields in the Patient and the
Administr. Information tabs.
No parser 4. Select Edit Name & MRN and press Enter to highlight
1. the Medical Record Number field.
2. 5. Scan a sample barcode that only contains one piece of
3. information (e.g., a Serial Number barcode from a
module’s device label).
6. Verify that the data is correctly populated into the
Medical Record Number field.
119
2106778-002
8.3.9 MC Network and S/5 Network

Perform the following test only if the patient monitor is connected to a wired MC Network or S/5
Network.
NOTE: Make sure that at least one other patient monitor is on the network. The other patient
monitor must be in an admitted state and have an active ECG measurement with a simulator
signal.
1. Check that a network symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen.
2. Select Data & Pages – Other Patients and select a patient from the list. 
3. Select View and verify that a window with parameters from another patient displays on
the left side of the screen. 
4. Select Close View to close the window.
8.3.10 Wireless LAN

Perform the following test only if the patient monitor is connected to a wireless MC Network or
S/5 Network.
NOTE: The wireless network must be properly installed and the patient monitor must be within
the wireless coverage area.
NOTE: Make sure that at least one other patient monitor is on the network. The other patient
monitor must be in an admitted state and have an active ECG measurement with a simulator
signal.
Checkout procedure for wireless patient monitors

Check each wireless patient monitor according to the following procedure.
The purpose of this test is to ensure that each wireless patient monitor is correctly configured
1. Disconnect the network cable from the MC Network connector, if connected.
2. Check that the wireless network symbol and the signal strength symbol are shown
and that the signal strength is adequate.
3. Select Data & Pages – Other Patients and select a patient from the list. 
4. Select View and verify that a window with parameters from another patient displays on
the left side of the screen. Check that the waveforms are continuous and there is no data
loss.
5. Select Close View to close the window.
120
2106778-002
7. Select Diagnostics > Ping.

8. Type the IP address of the patient monitor you just viewed and select ping. Check that the
patient monitor replies to the ping command, there are no lost packets and the maximum
latency is 250 ms.
NOTE: The patient monitor withstands a maximum packet loss of 5 packets per 1 million
and maximum latency of 250 ms without performance degradation.
9. Select to return to the main display.

10. Reconnect the MC Network cable back to the MC Network connector, if applicable.
Verification procedure for wireless MC Network infrastructure

Verify the wireless MC Network infrastructure according to the procedure described in
Appendix C.
The purpose of this test is to ensure the operation of the wireless network infrastructure
coverage area with a wireless CARESCAPE monitor.
8.3.11 IX printers
Perform the following test only if the patient monitor is connected to a printer in the IX Network
and you did not print a test page while you configured the IX printer.
2. Select Configuration > Printers > Print Test Page.
3. Select the IX Printer to test.
4. Select Save.
5. Verify that the test page was printed to the selected printer.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all connected IX printers.
8.3.12 InSite RSvP

Perform the following test only if the remote service is configured and enabled.
• Contact your local online support center to find out if they can view the patient monitor.

Discharge Patient or Reset Case to discard any changes made to the patient monitor
configuration during checkout.
• Complete the Appendix A. Installation check form.
121
2106778-002
For your notes:
122
2106778-002
9
CARESCAPE Monitor B650 System Diagram
TrimKnob
Speaker for Encoder
power failure
Alarm Cable
Alarm Light Board User Interface Board
15" LCD Display User Interface Controller

Touch Touch Screen Controller
Screen Indicator LED's ON/STBY button
Backlit LED's Power Indicator LEDs
Sensor
LED
Backlight
Figure 3
WLAN uDOM
Unit Tranceiver User Interface USB Disk On
CF Card Cable Module
Display (LVDS) Cable
Backlight Cable CPU Board ECG Analog Output

AC/DC Sync Board BP Analog Output
Power Supply Unit Speaker Marker In / Out
Sync Board Cable

Main Processor
Unit Memory (Flash, SDRAM)
Input: Watchdog & Voltage supervisor
100-240 VAC Real Time Clock Standard Interface Board
AC Inlet 50-60Hz Video Controller USB Power Switch
Mains filter Tone Generator & Supervisor
Output: DVI-I Filter & ESD Protection
Fuses USB Host Controller Ethernet PHY
AC/DC Cable
15.7V +/ -2% Power Management Controller (PMC)
Serial Interfaces
DC/DC Cable
Power path switches
Ethernet Interfaces
DC/DC Board Smart Battery charger
Card Bus Interface Advanced Interface Board
5V buck
3.3V buck Ethernet Module Bus Controller (EMBC) USB Power Switch
12V buck/boost Module Bus Interface DVI-I Filter & ESD Protection
15Vmod buck/boost Recorder interface Ethernet Switch
Theory of operation
Smart Battery Battery Pow & Chg LED drive Defib & IABP Sync Interface Ethernet PHY
+5Vpmc linreg
Connector I2C A/D
Li-ION Psys & Pmod meas.
System block diagram

Board ePort_power circuit breaker
9 - 12.3V On/stby & Remote_on
ePort resistor decode
Battery Cable
Hinge Flex Board
E-Module Interface Module Frame Flex Board

= Cable
Board
I2C A/D
= Connector PSM 15Vmod circuit breaker
15Vmod circuit breaker ePort_power circuit breaker
VSYS circuit breaker ePort resistor decode I/O Standard I/O Advanced I/O
= Board +/-15Va switcher USB 2 4
5Vmod buck DVI-I 1 1
I2C A/D 10/100BASE-T 1 4
= Functional Block I2C Modframe_temp Recorder Interface
Board DB9-ePort 0 1
Remote-ON 0 1
12V Circuit Breaker
= EMI Shield LC-filter
5V buck
PDM Docking
Recorder
2 x D25 E-Module
Connector 10-pin ePort 5-pin PSM
Connector Connector
The system block diagram describes the functional units of the CARESCAPE Monitor B650.
123
Theory of operation
2106778-002
The following sections describe the operation and interaction of the different subsystems.
9.1 Main components

9.1.1 Power management subsystem
DC/DC-Board block diagram
AC/DC
DC/DC Cable
Rs = DC/DC BOARD
Connnector
POWER ACDC 15.3-16V

SUPPLY Input Current = Excluded from the
Limiting
15.7V
SMART
non-battery DC/DC
+/-2% BAT_IDRES board
BATTERY
CHARGER
Connnector
Li-ION
Battery
Cable
SMART BAT
BATTERY
SMBus
9-12.3V
POWER
POWER
PATH
PATH
CONTROL
Power Path SWITCHES
IC
control signals
POWER_IN
VSYS ACDC VSYS CIRCUIT
BREAKER
SYS_CURRENT MOD_CURRENT
5V_PMC 8.7-16V (ac/dc use 14.9-16V) VSYS

LINREG Rs Rs
VSYS_EN
DC/DC Board
control signals
PMC CPU 15Vmod
LED control LED 3.3V 5V 12V
& BUCK/
DRIVE BUCK BUCK BUCK/BOOST
A/D ch's ON/STBY Control signals BOOST
02_PowerSupp_DCDC_Blk_Diag_M1058826_00
LOGIC to other boards
Backlight
Cable
Cpu Board Connector Cpu Board Connector
Connector
15Vmod &
SERIAL & I2C COMM. Front Panel +3.3V +5V +12V +15VMOD VSYS
ePort VSYS
ON/STBY CTRL Pow and Chg
B650-
1.vsd
Circuit
REMOTE_ON LEDs
Breakers
AC/DC Power Supply Unit

The AC/DC power supply unit is a compact, medical, switched-mode power supply with a
universal AC input. The high-efficiency design minimizes heat dissipation.
The AC input may vary between 90-264 Vac, 47-63 Hz single phase. It is designed to output
15.7 Vdc ± 2% and 110 W continuous output power for the DC/DC board.
The AC/DC power supply unit has over-temperature, overload and overvoltage protections.
Input protection is implemented with the fuses in the AC inlet.
Battery
The patient monitor has one optional, rechargeable 11.1 V, 6210 mAh lithium-ion battery,
located in the battery compartment.
The battery cable connects the battery board to the DC/DC board. The battery pack supports
Smart Battery Data and it communicates with the DC/DC board using the System Management
Bus (SM Bus). Battery management is handled by the DC/DC board.
124
2106778-002
Theory of operation
If there is a power failure (e.g., the supply mains is interrupted or the USB cable is
disconnected), the CARESCAPE D19KT VER01 display gives a continuous beeping alarm. This
alarm remains active for as long as there is some residual power left, or until it is silenced with
the Trim Knob or the standby button, or until the USB cable is reconnected or the supply mains
is restored. A power failure alarm is also indicated by the alarm light flashing yellow.
DC/DC Board
There are two versions of the DC/DC board: one for models with the optional battery and one
for models without battery. The non-battery version excludes the electronics needed for
battery charging and power path management.
The DC/DC board converts the output voltage of the AC/DC power supply, or the battery
voltage, to the following supply voltages:
• To +3.3 V supply voltage for the CPU board, LCD display, user interface board and the
standard/advanced interface board using a step-down converter.
• To + 5 V supply voltage for the CPU board, user interface board and the
standard/advanced interface board using a step-down converter.
• To +12 V supply voltage for the optional recorder and the LED backlight of the display
using a buck-boost converter.
• To + 15VMod supply voltage for the PSM module and the E-Module interface board using
a buck-boost converter. This converter is omitted in the non-battery models, where the
+15VMod power line is connected directly to the VSYS voltage.
• It passes the 8.7 -16 V (in AC/DC use 14.9-16 V) VSYS supply voltage for the E-Module
interface board, the 10-pin ePort connector in the PDM docking station and for the DB9
ePort connector in the advanced interface board. The power supply is capable to supply
VSYS voltage only to one ePort connector at a time.
• All supply voltages have over-voltage and short-circuit protection.
The DC/DC board takes care of the battery charging and controlling of the power path
switches. The power path switches select either AC/DC output voltage or battery voltage as the
DC/DC board input source.
The DC/DC board PMC CPU (Power Management Controller) controls power supplies'
sequencing. It measures board temperature and voltages by an internal A/D converter. System
and module currents also are measured and the corresponding power consumptions
calculated. PMC communicates with the CPU board via serial communication and with the
battery and battery charger IC via SM Bus. I2C bus (Inter-Integrated Circuit) is used for
communication with the A/D-converters and temperature sensors on the other boards of the
patient monitor.
The smart battery charger acts as an SM Bus slave device that responds to charging current
and charging voltage requests received via SM Bus. The charging requests are not sent directly
by the smart battery, but by the PMC CPU, which first asks the values from the battery. The PMC
may reduce or stop charging current if needed from the system point of view, i.e., if system
power consumption or temperature would get too high. The smart battery is responsible for
the charging algorithm and capacity calculation.
The battery charger has input current HW-limit feature. In a case where the input current
would exceed the limit, the charger reduces the output current to keep the input within the
limit. The AC/DC current for the whole system is taken through this current measurement as
well. This results in the charger reducing its output current if the sum of the charger input
current and system current exceeds the input limit. The purpose of this is to prevent the AC/DC
power source from getting overloaded if system power rapidly increases during charging.
125
2106778-002
Cooling
The patient monitor uses convection cooling. The ventilation openings of the device are located
in the rear of the monitor and below the front unit
The AC/DC power supply unit has a heat sink that is mounted to the aluminum rear unit
assembly to enhance cooling of the power supply.
126
2106778-002
X14 X17 X11
LVDS panel X2 I/O board connector Speaker CF-card
connector out WLAN
Current
Class D
+5V
sense
+3.3V
VSYS
Audio
SPI
Analog
Amplifier +5V Power
PMC_I2C
Amplifier Power
USB4
MAX4073 +3.3V switch
MDC/MDIO
MAX9759
REMOTE_ON/
24-bit Digital
TPS
+5V 2223A
LVDS
Amplifier LP filter
AUDIO_FB
OPA342
VDD_LCD
FP Bus signals
+3.3V VDD
Flat panel VDD control
switch
Figure 4
Display controller USB2 USB audio
VSYNC to inverter Silicon Motion USB 2.0 codec Cardbus
+1.5V USB3 PCM2901
Lynx3DM+ Controller controller
+1.8V SM722 uPD720101 USB1 +3.3V PCI1520
Power
9.1.2 CPU subsystem
+3.3V MII 10/100 Ethernet interface

supply +2.5V
FCC1
+2.5/3.3V
Transmit & Receive clocks +3.3V +3.3V
I/O: CLK9 & 10
PCICLK2
Reg/Gnt0
Reg/Gnt2
Reg/Gnt1
PCICLK1
PCICLK3
100 CLK_SDRAM +3.3V
PCI bus PCI
MHz
100 MHz interface
MPC9448
CLK buffer
CLKIN PCI arbitrator signals
33 MHz 32-bit
+3.3V
33 MHz Clock
CLKOUT
buffer
3V, 125mAh FB CY2309
+1.5V/1.8V/2.5V/3.3V Feedback
G7
VBAT +3.3V
PORESET
Lithium Reset Power_on reset
LTC2900
Watchdog
Battery PORESET
Watchdog
WD_KICK X12
MAX793 SDRAM Boot FLASH
PFAIL/
+3.3V/VBAT 16 MB 16-bit uDOC
BATTERY_OK 512 MB 64-bit
BRIGHTNESS I/O 1 chip connector
8 chips
EN_BACKLIGHT K4S511632M 28F128J3A
+3.3V (P30 series uses 1.8V)
POW/BATTERY_LEDS
60x bus +3.3V +1.8V/
interface +3.3V
ON/STBY_BUTTON
Power management, LVTTL, 19200 2-wire serial port 100 MHz 64-bit
RXD_TO_PMC & TXD_FROM_PMC SMSER2_TXD & SMSER2_RXD
SMC2
Buffer
~CS2
~CS0
60x bus
60x bus
~CS1 &
REMOTE_ON/ uSSD
CLK_SDRAM
Bus
signal Modular Flash Disk
PD_RDY
buffers 1 GB
+3.3V MDD1675-D32-P
+5V
Chip selects +5V
+12V
MPC8270
CPU board block diagram

Memory Buffer
X10 connector to DC/DC board

+15VMOD
controller controls
VSYS USB2
Interrupt PFAIL/ +3.3V

PMC_I2C I2C RTC
+3.3V/VBAT I2C Interrupt AUDIO_FB +5V
RX-8581
enables
PMC_I2C
I2C
+3.3V
PSM, EMOD &

MODRACK power
I/O PD_RDY ON/STBY_BUTTON
+12V I/O EN_BACKLIGHT

board
+15VMOD I/O MDC/MDIO

Keyboard LEDs
VSYS MDC/MDIO I/O
Ethernet
Ethernet to ePort on EMBC board MII 10/100 Ethernet interface Alarm LEDs
frame board
PHY FCC3 I/O
X13 connector user interface
10/100Base-T
2x Modbus DP83848 Transmit & Receive clocks
Transformer
I/O: CLK15 & 16
X3 Connector to Module
4-wire serial to Rec POW/BATTERY_LEDS
+3.3V
PORESET
MODBUS_PSM SMC1
MODBUS_EMOD
Watchdog
RS-485 Boot FLASH
MAX823
buffers Atmel SCC4
REC_RESET Buffer 2x Serial
Max3486E AT45DB011B
REC_READY +3.3V 2-wire serial port
REC_PRESENT +3.3V +3.3V
SCC1 SER1_TXD & SER1_RXD
SPI
Reset
X9 Serial
connector
MII 10/100 Ethernet , MAC-to-MAC connection

FCC2
ARM9 EMBC
COP/JTAG signals Ethernet tramsmit and receive clocks
X4
I/O
Atmel I/O: CLK13 & 14
AT91RM9200
connector
SPI
ARM9 JTAG
COP/JTAG signals
16 JTAG Port
X1
ECG_ANALOG_OUT +1.8/3.3V MHz BRGO6 SPI

connector
+1.5/3.3V
Development
Analog
IBP_ANALOG_OUT NAND FLASH control
interface
CS1
MARKER_OUT block ARM bus
+1.5/1.8/2.5/3.3/5/+12V/-12V/VSYS SPI ADC +
MARKER_IN SPI
temp sensor SPI DAC BRIGHTNESS
+3.3/+12V/-12V SDRAM
NAND FLASH
64 MB 32-bit AUDIO_FB ADT7411
ANALOG_OUT_REF 32 MB 8-bit
sync. connector
2 chips 2072926-001 CPU block diagram.vsd
SPI
X19 Defib. & IABP

K9F5608UOC +3.3V +3.3V
MT48LC16M16
+3.3V +3.3V
127
Theory of operation
2106778-002
Main processor and memory:

• The main processor manages the data processing of the patient monitor.
• It has non-volatile flash memory for the bootloader software and Linux kernel and volatile
SDRAM memory for run time code execution and temporary data storage.
• A detachable, non-volatile flash memory, USB Disk On Module (uDOM), is used as the
permanent memory for application, platform and service software and to store clinical
and platform settings. The uDOM may hold two versions of the software in different
partitions: inactive and active.
EMBC section:
• The Ethernet module bus controller (EMBC) section in the CPU board has its own micro
controller. It has serial flash memory for the EMBC bootloader software, NAND flash for
EMBC application software and Linux kernel and SDRAM for run time EMBC code
execution and temporary data storage.
• The EMBC section communicates with the main processor using Ethernet
communication.
• The EMBC section takes care of the following CPU services:
• It provides serial communication for the optional built-in recorder.
• It provides RS-485 module bus communication for the E-modules and PSM module.
• It provides analog ECG and invasive pressure outputs and a digital marker-out
signal for a user-supplied equipment, e.g., a defibrillator or an intra-aortic balloon
pump.
Supply voltages:
• The CPU has converters to generate +1.5 V, + 1.8 V and +2.5 V supply voltages for the
processors and +12 V and -12 V voltages for the sync connector signals from the +3.3 V
received from the DC/DC board.
• The CPU board passes the supply voltages created by the DC/DC board for all other
electronics in the system, except for the LED backlight of the display.
System supervision:
• Watchdog timers control the operation of the main processor and EMBC processor
software execution.
• The CPU board has battery backed-up real-time clock to store system date and time.
• An I2C A/D converter and SPI temperature sensor measure the CPU supply voltages and
board temperature.
Video system:
• The CPU board has a video controller that provides LVDS output to the LCD panel via the
display cable and analog and digital video signals for an optional secondary display that
is connected to the DVI-I connector in the interface board.
• The CPU board also provides a brightness control signal and a digital backlight enable
signal for the display.
Audio system:
• The CPU board has a tone generator and audio amplifier that sends the audible alarm
signals to the main speaker. Audio feedback controls the operation of the speaker.
128
2106778-002
Theory of operation
Support for interfaces:

• A USB host controller (root hub) provides a high speed USB interface for the external USB
ports in the interface boards and for the internal system components (user interface
board, tone generator and for the USB Disk On Module).
• The main processor provides one link layer interface for the external RJ-45 Ethernet ports
and ePort DB9 PDM interface in the interface board.
• The CPU board provides a physical layer Ethernet interface for the 10-pin ePort connector
in the PDM docking station.
9.1.3 Display subsystem

The patient monitor has an integrated 15" active matrix color TFT LCD panel with an LED
backlight unit. It provides wide viewing angle and supports XGA (1024 * 768 pixels) resolution.
The video controller is integrated into the CPU board. The CPU board provides LVDS output and
+3.3 V supply voltage to the LCD panel via the display cable.
9.1.4 User interface subsystem

User interface board
The user interface board has a micro controller that manages the following main functions:
• It reads the user input from the Trim Knob encoder and passes the information to the CPU
board.
• A separate touchscreen controller digitizes the user input received from the touchscreen
sensor and passes the coordinate information directly to the CPU board.
• It turns the alarm light LEDs on and off according to the information received from the
CPU board.
• It digitizes the information of the ambient light sensor and passes it to the CPU board.
• It adjusts the brightness of the alarm light according to the information received from the
CPU board.
• It provides an audible alarm using a buzzer in case of a main speaker failure (B650
without battery option only).
• It provides a visual and audible power failure alarm control in case of sudden system
power loss (B650 without battery option only).
• It passes the drive signals coming from DC/DC board via CPU board to the power
indicator LEDs
The user interface cable connects the user interface board to the CPU board:
• The data communication method used is USB communication.
• It passes the +3.3 V and +5 V supply voltages and power indicator LEDs' status to the user
interface board from the DC/DC board.
• The on/standby button press is passed to the DC/DC board via the CPU board.
129
2106778-002
Indicator
LEDs
X200 keyboard interface connector

User Interface Board
ON/STBY
ON/STBY
+3.3V
LEDs
Keyboard Matrix X-lines (4)

I/O Keyboard Matrix Y-lines (4)
Filters Keyboard
G_BAT_LED_PT
O_CHG_LED_PT PWM3 LED Keyboard

driver backlight
circuits LEDs
G_POW_LED_PT ATMEL AT91SAM7S +3.3V LT3591
LQFP64
ON/STBY_BUTTON_PT
POWER_FAILURE_AUDIO_ALARM
XTAL PWM2
16MHz Clock input
X100 FM2CPU Board
interface connector
+3.3V_SC +3.3V
X202 Trimknob interface

+5V ~JTAG_RST Reset
MAX823 ~TS_RST Trimknob direction signal A TKNOB_A
connector
+3.3V IRQ0
Smith-Trigger
buffers
Trimknob direction signal B TKNOB_B
+5V IRQ1
Trimknob pushbutton TKNOB_PB
+3.3V ~HUB_RST I/O
MAX823 +3.3V
POWER_FAILURE_VISUAL_ALARM
PWM1
X204 Alarm Light Board interface

ALARM_PWM SILENCE_ALARMS
USB (full speed) USB (full speed) PWM0 AND
USB HUB USB port SILENCE_ALARM_EN
I/O port
& YELLOW_ALARM
connector
TI TUSB2036
XTAL LQFP32 +3.3V_SC RED_ALARM
~HUB_RST
6MHz
+3.3V CYAN_ALARM
(full speed)
ALARM_EN1 Mux
USB
I/O +3.3V_SC
MAX4634
X401 Touch Screen
ALARM_EN2
I/O +5V
connector
Touch Screen signals (5) +3.3_SC

~TS_RST LIGHT_SENSOR_AD
Touch Screen
Controller
XTAL electronics
6MHz JTAG (5)
JTAG
DOC1432101-1-B650-02 UI Block Diagram

+3.3V / +5V
X204 JTAG
connector
2-wire debug serial port
LIGHT_SENSOR_AD ADC SERIAL
~JTAG_RST
+3.3V_SC
LDO Regulator +2V Step-up DC/DC
+3.3V +3.3V_SC
LT1963A converter
Supercapacitor
10F, 2.5V
Current
limitter
Figure 5 User interface board block diagram
Touchscreen sensor
The patient monitor has a resistive touchscreen sensor in the front of the LCD panel. The
touchscreen sensor detects the presence and location of a touch within the display area and
communicates the information to the touchscreen controller.
Trim Knob
The Trim Knob control is a rotary-switch with a push selection operation. The Trim Knob
encoder detects the direction of the Trim Knob rotation and push button use and passes that
information to the CPU board via the user interface board.
Alarm light board

The right hand side of the alarm light board contains red, yellow and blue LEDs to display
different priority visual alarms. The left hand side of the alarm light board has blue LEDs for the
silence alarm indicator light.
The alarm light board also has a separate light sensor that is capable of measuring the
ambient light intensity. The ambient light feedback can be used to auto-adjust the brightness
of the alarm light LEDs and the LCD display backlight to the different ambient light conditions.
The alarm light board is connected to the user interface board with the alarm light cable.
Speaker
The main speaker is used to provide audible alarms. The speaker cable is connected directly to
the CPU board. The audio signal for the speaker is generated in the CPU board using a tone
generator and an audio amplifier. Audio feedback controls the operation of the speaker.
130
2106778-002
Theory of operation
Buzzer (B650 without battery option only)

The buzzer is connected to the user interface board. It functions as a back-up speaker and also
provides an audible power loss alarm.
9.1.5 External Interfaces

Interface boards
There are two versions of the interface board: a Standard Interface Board and an Advanced
Interface Board.
Connector Standard Interface Board Advanced Interface Board

USB 2.0 2 4
DVI-I 1 1
10/100 BASE-T Ethernet 1 4
interface (RJ-45)
ePort (DB9) - 1
Remote-on connector - 1
The interface boards provide the following main functions:

• They have a high speed USB hub that provides 2 to 4 downstream (Type A) USB ports for
the USB input devices. The on board USB hub interfaces with the USB host controller (root
hub) in the CPU board.
• It passes the analog video signals from the video controller in the CPU board to the DVI-I
connector.
• The 24-bit digital video input from the video controller is converted by an on board DVI
transmitter to 3 TDMS data channels (single link). These provide digital video signals to the
DVI-I connector.
• It provides Ethernet interfaces:
• The Standard Interface Board has a single Ethernet transceiver to provide a physical
layer interface for 1 RJ-45 connector.
• The Advanced Interface Board has an Ethernet switch that provides physical layer
interface for 4 RJ-45 connectors and for 1 DB9 ePort connector.
• Both boards have one link layer interface to the Ethernet controller that is integrated
to the microprocessor in the CPU board.
• The Advanced Interface Board passes the remote-on signal, i.e., an on/standby signal
from an external device, to the PMC CPU in the DC/DC board. The operation of the
remote-on connector is disabled when the patient monitor is battery powered.
• The Advanced Interface Board has I2C A/D converter and I2C temperature sensor to
measure the on board VSYS and VSYS ePort (DB9) voltage and board temperature. This
information is communicated to the PMC CPU in the DC/DC board over the I2C -bus.
The Standard and Advanced Interface Boards receive +3.3 V and + 5V supply voltages from the
DC/DC board via the CPU board. In addition the Advanced Interface Board receives the VSYS
supply voltage.
The VSYS OPTION voltage is provided for a PDM through the DB9 ePort connector. Once the
PDM is detected and if the VSYS ePort voltage is not enabled, the VSYS OPTION's circuit breaker
is enabled by a control signal from the PMC.
131
2106778-002
The external connectors have ESD protection. RJ-45 connectors provide isolation.
FM2OPTIO board
Remote On
28.08.2009
X5
Remote_ON
M1059909 USB1
Filtering
and
USB2 ESD
protection
Filtered
USB1
Dual USB
MIC2026
Serial
2 x 500 mA
X3
I2C EEPROM +5V Filtered
current limit USB2
I2C
SPI USB3
Filtering
and
Remote_ON USB4 ESD
protection
High Speed
USB4 from FM2CPU
USB HUB Filtered
USB3
Dual USB
MIC2026
X2 CPU board connector
VSYS
2 x 500 mA
X4
+3.3V / +5V +5V Filtered
+3.3V
current limit USB4
2.1A current
limit with
+5V +5V_limited
ADM1170
Hot swap +5V
controller TMDS differential data lines Filtered TMDS
Filtering
DVI-I
Sil164
X1
and
24-bit Digital bus
PanelLink ESD
Filtered analog
Transmitter protection
Analog +3.3V
Temp sensor
I2C &
AD-converter
MII (MAC-to-MAC) VSYS Circuit Breaker

Transmit & Receive clocks
Eport
Ethernet switch
X7
Magnetics
BCM5325(E) 10Base-T
SPI
D-SUB9
+1.8V / +3.3V
Magnetics
10/100Base-TX
NET3 & NET4

X6
Power
+3.3V +1.8V
supply
Magnetics
10/100Base-TX
Indicator
LEDS
Dual stacked CAT5
connector
Indicator
LEDS
M1059909_001 Advanced IO Block diagram.vsd

Magnetics
10/100Base-TX
NET1 & NET2

X8
Magnetics
10/100Base-TX
Dual stacked CAT5

connector
Figure 6 Advanced Interface Board block diagram
Synchronization connector
The synchronization connector provides analog ECG and invasive pressure outputs and a
digital marker-out signal for external user-supplied equipment, e.g., a defibrillator or an
intra-aortic balloon pump. This connector does not operate with the PDM module.
See Synchronization connector test in Maintenance chapter for details about the pin layout.
WLAN
The optional IEEE 802.11a/b/g WLAN client radio enables wireless network communication in
the 2.4 and 5.1 GHz frequency bands.
The Compact Flash (CF) WLAN client radio connects to the CF socket in the CPU board. The two
internal dual-band antennas are attached to the front unit assembly.
WLAN connection is activated when the monitor is not connected to a wired network through
the MC port.
9.1.6 Pivoting module frame

Hinge flex board
The hinge flex board interfaces the E-module interface board and the module frame flex board
to the CPU board.
132
2106778-002
Theory of operation
Module frame flex board

The module frame flex board interfaces the recorder assembly, PDM interface and PSM
interface to the hinge flex board.
The module frame flex board provides the following main functions:
• It routes the +12 V supply voltage, recorder control signals and the serial communication
lines to the recorder assembly.
• It routes the RS-485 communication lines to a PSM module.
• It has a circuit breaker for the +15 VMod PSM supply voltage. The circuit breaker is
enabled by a control signal set by the PMC CPU after the main CPU has requested to
enable the voltage.
• It routes the Ethernet communication lines to a PDM module.
• It has a circuit breaker for the VSYS PDM supply voltage. The circuit breaker is enabled by
a control signal set by the PMC CPU after a PDM ID resistor has been detected.
• The +15VMod PSM circuit breaker is enabled in start-up by a control signal received from
the PMC CPU.
• The VSYS PDM circuit breaker is enabled by a control signal set by the PMC CPU after the
main CPU has requested module voltages enabling, providing that the other PDM
connection port is not connected.
• It has an I2C A/D converter to measure the on board (+15V MOD PSM, VSYS RACK and
VSYS ePort) and recorder (+5V REC and +12 V REC) supply voltages. This information is
communicated to the PMC CPU in the DC/DC board over the I2C -bus.
E-module interface board

The E-module interface board connects to the hinge flex board. It has two D25 male
connectors that provide an interface for two single-width E-modules or for one double-width
E-module.
The E-module interface board provides the following main functions:
• It routes the RS-485 communication lines from the hinge flex board to the E-modules.
• It generates a +5VMod supply voltage for the connected E-modules from the VSYS input
voltage using a step-down converter.
• It generates +15Va and -15Va supply voltages for the connected E-modules from the
+15VMod input voltage using a flyback converter.
• It passes the + 15VMod input voltage as a +15VD supply voltage for the connected
E-modules.
• It has circuit breakers for the VSYS and +15VMod supply voltages. The circuit breakers are
enabled by the PMC CPU after the main CPU has requested to enable these module
voltages. The sequencing of the flyback and step-down converter is controlled by on
board electronics.
• Overvoltage of the generated supply voltages will disable the VSYS and +15VMod circuit
breakers.
• An I2C A/D converter and I2C temperature sensor measure the supply voltages
generated for the E-modules and the board temperature. The information is
communicated to the PMC CPU in the DC/DC board over the I2C -bus.
133
2106778-002
BREAKER
CIRCUIT
+15Vmod +15VD
+15Va
+/-15Va
FLYBACK
MODRACK_POW_EN -15Va
D25 MODULE BUS CONNECTOR SLOT 1

EN
D25 MODULE BUS CONNECTOR SLOT 2

HINGE FLEX BOARD CONNECTOR
BREAKER
CIRCUIT
VSYS 8.5 - 16V 5Vmod +5Vmod
BUCK
+15Vmod
5V
+5V
Linear
Regulator
I2C +15VD
I2C
I2C-BUS A/D- +15Va Over- OVERV_SD
Temp
Converter Voltage
Sensor -15Va
8-ch Protection
EMOD_ID +5Vmod
M1058830_002pivot_block_diagram.vsd
RS485 MODBUS DATA
Figure 7 E-module interface board block diagram
Recorder assembly
The optional recorder assembly consists of a 50 mm recorder and a recorder board.
The recorder board interfaces the recorder to the module frame flex board. The recorder board
provides the following main functions:
• It passes the recorder control signals and the serial communication lines to the recorder.
• It has a circuit-breaker and an LC-filter for the +12 V REC supply voltage.
• It has a step-down converter that generates the +5 V REC supply voltage for the recorder
from the +12 V received from the DC/DC board.
PDM interface
The detachable PDM docking station interfaces to the module frame flex board.
The 10-pin PDM connector provides the VSYS ePort supply voltage and the Ethernet
communication lines to the PDM module.
PSM interface
The PSM connector is part of the module frame flex board.
The PSM connector provides the +15 VMod PSM supply voltage and the RS-485 communication
lines to the PSM module.
134
2106778-002
Maintenance and checkout
10 Maintenance and checkout

This chapter specifies the checkout procedure and the maintenance activities to be performed
to the patient monitor after corrective maintenance and during planned maintenance.
WARNING Only perform maintenance procedures specifically described in the manual.
WARNING Planned maintenance should be carried out at recommended interval.
Failure to implement the recommended maintenance schedule may cause
equipment failure and possible health hazards.
NOTE: The manufacturer does not, in any manner, assume the responsibility for performing the
recommended maintenance schedule, unless an Equipment Maintenance Agreement exists.
The sole responsibility rests with the individuals, hospitals, or institutions utilizing the device.
NOTE: Refer to Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for corrective and planned
maintenance checkout procedures of the parameter modules.
NOTE: Refer to the PDM section in the Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for the
battery maintenance procedure of the PDM battery.
Corrective maintenance
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure steps after any corrective
maintenance, before taking the monitor back into clinical use:
 Required checkout procedure


Visual Electrical Functional check
Performed service activity
inspections safety test (section 10.3)
(section 10.1) (section 10.2)
After detaching, replacing or - 10.3.1 Start-up
upgrading: - 10.3.3 PSM / PDM
- Recorder Unit FRU / Upgrade Yes Yes identification
- E-module Board FRU / Upgrade - 10.3.4 E-module identification
- Module Frame Assembly FRU - 10.3.13 Recorder
After detaching or replacing: Yes No - 10.3.1 Start-up
- PDM Docking Mechanism FRU - 10.3.3 PSM / PDM
- Module Frame Cover Unit Set FRU identification
After detaching, replacing or - 10.3.1 Start-up

upgrading: Yes Yes - 10.3.6 Mouse
- Standard Interface Board FRU - 10.3.7 Alphanumeric
- Advanced Interface Board FRU / keyboard
Upgrade - 10.3.9 MC Network and S/5
Network
After replacing or upgrading: Yes No - 10.3.1 Start-up
- Wireless LAN FRU / Upgrade - 10.3.10 Wireless LAN
After replacing: Yes No - 10.3.1 Start-up
- Mains Fuses FRU
- Battery FRU
135
2106778-002
 Required checkout procedure


Visual Electrical Functional check
Performed service activity
inspections safety test (section 10.3)
(section 10.1) (section 10.2)
After detaching or replacing: Yes Yes - 10.3.1 Start-up
- Front Unit Assembly FRU - 10.3.5 Keypad and remote
- User Interface Board FRU
- Trim Knob and Trim Knob Encoder
FRU
After detaching or replacing: Yes Yes - 10.3.1 Start-up

- LCD Display Unit FRU - 10.3.2. Display
- 10.3.3 PSM / PDM
identification
After detaching or replacing: Yes Yes - All steps, except 10.3.14
- Rear Unit Assembly FRU Synchronization connector
test.
- AC/DC Power Supply Unit FRU
- DC/DC board FRU
- CPU timekeeper battery FRU
- Hinge Flex Board
After replacing: Yes Yes - All steps, except 10.3.14
- uDOM Synchronization connector
test.
After detaching or replacing: Yes Yes - All functional check steps.
- Base Unit
- Mid-Frame Assembly FRU
- CPU board
Planned maintenance schedule

Perform the planned maintenance procedure every 2 years after installation. Perform the
procedure in the following order:
1. Visual inspection (section 10.1)
2. Electrical safety tests (section 10.2)
3. Functional check (section 10.3, all steps)
4. Battery maintenance (section 10.4 Monitor battery maintenance)
Replace the CPU timekeeper battery every 5 years, or whenever the Service Monitor Error
Code 0xHOST1100 message is shown.

Follow the procedure in section 8.1. Visual inspection.
136
2106778-002
10.2 Electrical safety checks

Electrical safety tests provide a method of determining if potential electrical health hazards to
the patient or operator of the device exist.
Perform the following electrical safety tests described in detail in chapter 8. Installation
checkout:
 8.2.1. Test setup
 8.2.2. Power outlet
 8.2.3. Power cord and plug
 8.2.4. Ground integrity check
 8.2.5. Ground leakage current test
 8.2.6. Testing touch current
Record the values of the tests on the Appendix B. Maintenance check form.
10.3 Functional check

10.3.1 Start-up
Follow the procedure in section 8.3.1. Start-up.
10.3.2 Display
Follow the procedure in section 8.3.2. Display.
10.3.3 PSM / PDM identification

1. Configure the ECG1 waveform field and the NIBP parameter window to the patient
monitor screen with adequate priority. Connect a PSM or PDM module to the patient
monitor.
2. Verify that the ECG waveform field, the NIBP parameter window and the related
information appear on the patient monitor screen.
10.3.4 E-module identification

2. Select Information > Device Information.
3. Verify that the information about the connected module appears in the table named as
“Acquisition Information – E-Modules”. 
NOTE: For some parameter modules, the table does not show the actual module information,
but the information of the individual subassemblies inside the module.
NOTE: You may need to refresh the Webmin screen if you have connected the module to the
patient monitor after entering the Device Information Webmin screen.
10.3.5 Keypad and remote

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.5. Trim knob, secondary display, and remote.
137
2106778-002
10.3.6 Mouse
Follow the procedure in section 8.3.6. Mouse.
10.3.7 Alphanumeric keyboard

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.7. Alphanumeric keyboard.
10.3.8 Barcode reader

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.8. Barcode reader.
10.3.9 MC Network and S/5 Network

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.9. MC Network and S/5 Network.
10.3.10 Wireless LAN

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.10. Wireless LAN.
10.3.11 IX printers
Follow the procedure in section 8.3.11. IX printers.
10.3.12 InSite RSvP

Follow the procedure in section 8.3.12. InSite RSvP.
10.3.13 Recorder
1. Select Monitor Setup > Printing > Devices > Setup and configure:
Printout: Waveforms
Location: Local
2. Select Monitor Setup > Printing > Waveforms and configure:

Waveform 1: II
Waveform 2: V1
3. Select one of the following options to start printing:

 Select Print Waveforms from the main screen.
 Select Monitor Setup > Printing > Waveforms > Print Waveforms.
4. Verify that the recorder starts printing. Let the recorder print for approximately 10
seconds and verify the following things from the printout:
 The header line contains the date, time and some other applicable status and
configuration information.
 The grid is clear.
 The waveforms labels appear in the printout as configured.
Select one of the following options to stop printing:
 Select Stop Printing from the main screen.
 Select Monitor Setup > Printing > Waveforms > Stop Printing.
138
2106778-002
10.3.14 Synchronization connector test

Perform this test only if an E-PSMP or an E-PSM(P)(W) module is in use with the patient monitor.
NOTE: This test can't be performed with a PDM module. If the patient monitor is only used with
a PDM module, the synchronization connector test is not applicable.
Required Tools
 E-PSMP module
 A multiparameter patient simulator with invasive pressure adapter cable to GE invasive
pressure connector.
 5 lead ECG trunk cable, IEC or AHA
 5 leadwire set, IEC or AHA
 Oscilloscope
 Analog output cable (2000633-001)
NOTE: You can alternatively use the GE defib sync tester, 2040582-001, together with the
Analog output cable, 2000633-001 and a multiparameter simulator to perform this test. Follow
the instructions included with the tester. See analog output cable wire colors and related
signals from the table below.
Connecting cables
1. Ensure that the module is connected to the patient monitor.
2. Connect the 5-lead ECG trunk cable to the green ECG connector in the module.
3. Connect the 5-leadwire sets to the trunk cable and to the simulator.
4. Connect the invasive pressure adapter cable to the simulator and the other end to the
module.
5. Connect the analog output cable to the defibrillation synchronization connector in the
patient monitor.
6. Connect the open wires of the other end of the analog output cable to the oscilloscope
probe as described in each test. Use the figure and table below as a reference for making
the connections.
Defibrillation synchronization connector Related wire color in the open

end of the Analog output cable
Pin number Signal
*)
1 Digital defibrillator synchronization Black
marker out signal
2 Digital defibrillator synchronization Green
marker in signal
3 Common GND Red
4 Analog GND Blue
139
2106778-002
Defibrillation synchronization connector Related wire color in the open

end of the Analog output cable
Pin number Signal
*)
5 Analog GND White
6 IP analog output Yellow
7 ECG analog output Grey
*) Brown wire is not connected.
Configuring the monitor

1. Configure ECG:
a. Select ECG1 to the screen with waveform and adequate priority.
b. In the Parameter Setup > ECG > Setup, select ECG1 Lead: II.
2. Configure invasive pressure:

a. Select P1 to the screen with waveform and adequate priority.
b. In the Parameter Setup > Invasive Pressures > P1, select:
 Label: P1.
 Scale (mmHg): 0-200 mmHg.
 Parameter Format: Sys/Dia (Mean).
Configuring the simulator

Refer to the simulator documentation for details on how to use and configure the simulator.
1. Configure ECG:
 ECG rhythm: a normal sinus rhythm.
 Heart rate: 80 bpm,
 Amplitude: 1 mV.
2. Only for modules with invasive pressure: configure invasive pressure:

 Sensitivity: 5 µV/V/mmHg.
 InvBP output: “0 mmHg static pressure” or “atmosphere”.
Testing the synchronization connector

1. Test the ECG analog output signal:
a. Connect the oscilloscope probe to the ECG analog output signal (grey wire) and analog
ground (blue or white wire).
140
2106778-002
b. Adjust the oscilloscope Time and Volts scales:
ECG analog output signal: Grey

Analog GND: Blue or White
Probe Type: x10
Time/Division: 200 mS
Volts/Division: 0.5V
c. Verify that the ECG analog output waveform shown on the oscilloscope screen
corresponds to the ECG1 waveform on the monitor screen.
2. Test the Arterial BP output signal:

a. Ensure that the simulator’s InvBP output channel is configured to 0 mmHg static pressure
or atmosphere.
b. Press the Zero P1 module key.
c. Check that a Zeroing message changes to a Zeroed message in the P1 parameter
window.
d. Configure the simulator's InvBP output channel to Arterial 120/80.
e. Connect the oscilloscope probe to the InvBP output signal (yellow wire) and analog
ground (blue or white wire).
f. Change the oscilloscope Volts scale:
IP analog output signal: Yellow

Analog GND: Blue or White
Probe Type: x10
Volts/Division: 0.2V
g. Verify that the Arterial BP output waveform shown on the oscilloscope screen
corresponds to the P1 waveform on the monitor screen.
3. Test the frequency of the Marker out signal

a. Connect the oscilloscope probe to the marker out signal (black wire) and common ground
(red wire).
141
2106778-002
b. Change the oscilloscope Volts scale:
Digital defibrillator synchronization marker out

signal: Black
Common GND: Red
Probe Type: x10
Volts/Division: 2V
c. Verify that the signal shown on the oscilloscope screen corresponds to the picture above.
4. Test the pulse width of the Marker out signal:

a. Change the Time scale in the oscilloscope:
Digital defibrillator synchronization marker out

signal: Black
Common GND: Red
Probe Type: x10
Time/Division: 5 mS
Volts/Division: 2V
b. Verify that the signal shown on oscilloscope screen corresponds to the picture above

Select Discharge Patient or Reset Case to discard any changes made to the patient monitor
configuration during checkout.
• Complete the Appendix B. Maintenance check form.
10.4 Monitor battery maintenance

The lithium-ion (Li-Ion) battery is a rechargeable battery containing lithium-ion cells. Each
battery contains an integrated electronic fuel gauge and a safety protection circuit.
The following are facts about lithium-ion battery technology:
 The battery discharges on its own, even when it is not installed in the equipment. This
discharge is the result of the lithium-ion cells and the bias current required for the
integrated electronics.
 The capacity loss of the battery degrades significantly at higher temperatures.
 As the battery ages, the full-charge capacity of the battery degrades and is permanently
lost. As a result, the amount of charge that is stored and available for use is reduced.
The following terms are used to define the battery capacity:
 Design capacity — The theoretical capacity of the battery cells when the battery is new.
 Full-charge capacity — The actual amount of charge the battery can store and deliver.
142
2106778-002
 Remaining charge capacity — The amount of full-charge capacity currently remaining in

the battery. This is a percent of full-charge capacity.
10.4.1 Use recommendations

GE recommends the following methods to improve battery performance:
 Location — Position the equipment in a location that does not artificially increase the
operating temperature of the batteries.
 Conditioning guideline —Test the run time of a fully charged battery every 12 months
after the installation. If the battery run time is less than 30 minutes, condition the battery.
The condition cycle recalibrates the electronic fuel gauge.
10.4.2 Storage recommendations

GE recommends storing the battery outside of the device at a temperature between 20°C to
25°C (68°F to 77°F).
10.4.3 Testing the battery charge

Before installing a battery, verify the battery’s state of charge. Press the green TEST button on
the battery. The number of charge level indicator LEDs that illuminate indicates the
approximate charge remaining in the battery.
 Four LEDs illuminated: 75% – 100% of full-charge capacity.
 Three LEDs illuminated: 50% – 74.9% of full-charge capacity.
 Two LEDs illuminated: 25% – 49.9% of full-charge capacity.
 One LED illuminated: 10% – 24.9% of full-charge capacity.
 One LED flashing: < 10% of full-charge capacity remaining.
10.4.4 Charging a battery

The battery is charged whenever it is installed into the patient monitor and the patient monitor
is connected to an AC power source. The battery is charging both when the patient monitor is
turned on and when it is in the standby mode.
Battery is charging as long as the orange battery charging LED indicator is lit.
To check the battery charge status, select Monitor Setup > Battery Status > Advanced.
10.4.5 Conditioning a battery

The condition cycle recalibrates the electronic fuel gauge. Condition the battery by fully
discharging and recharging the battery twice according to the following procedure:
NOTE: The patient monitor must be in a discharged state during battery conditioning.
Disconnect any acquisition modules from the patient monitor if connected.
1. Turn on the patient monitor. Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet. Leave the
patient monitor on until the battery is fully discharged and the patient monitor turns off
automatically.
NOTE: Ignore the Monitor Battery Low and Monitor Battery Empty! messages when
discharging the battery.
2. Reconnect the power cord to the wall outlet and turn on the patient monitor. Leave the
patient monitor on until the battery is fully recharged and the orange battery charging
indicator LED turns off.
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 once.
143
2106778-002
The battery is now conditioned and ready for use. If the problem persists, replace the battery.
10.4.6 Replacing a battery

Replace the battery if the conditioning does not recover the battery capacity.
Remove the battery from the patient monitor and install a new battery according to the battery
installation instructions in the Hardware installation section.
WARNING Do not incinerate a battery or store at high temperatures. Serious injury or
death could result.
10.4.7 Battery recycling
This product contains Lithium-Ion batteries. At the end of their service

life, batteries in this product must be recycled or disposed in
accordance with local or national regulations. Do not dispose of
batteries as trash or unsorted municipal waste. Requirements and
services for recycling of batteries vary between countries.
•USA: You may follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions on the
battery to recycle it. Alternatively, you may return GE product batteries to GE for recycling.
For information about returning batteries to GE, contact your authorized GE Service
representative or contact GE Equipment Services at 1-800-437-1171.
• Canada: Contact the approved battery stewardship program in your province for
information on recycling your batteries.
• Other countries: Recycle batteries through your local, regional or national collective
scheme in accordance with your local or national regulations.
144
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
11 Troubleshooting
The problems and solutions in this section represent only a few of the faults that you may
encounter and are not intended to cover every possible problem that may occur.
This chapter focuses on troubleshooting technical problems. See the patient monitor’s user’s
manual for troubleshooting monitoring problems and clinical configuration issues.
If the problem remains, call technical support for service. To ensure accurate problem solving,
please be prepared to provide the following information:
• Problem description and the troubleshooting done so far.
• Configuration information (section “11.2.1”)
• Device information (section “11.2.2”)
• Service Logs (section “11.3.4”)
• Error messages displayed, if any.
• Other information, as requested.

Before beginning any detailed troubleshooting, complete a thorough visual inspection to be
sure that:
• There is no physical damage.
• All peripheral devices are connected properly.
• The patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices are properly powered.
Also verify that the problem is not caused because of:
1. Incompatibility issue. See the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for the
list of compatible devices.
2. Incorrect platform or clinical configuration. Refer to the chapter 7. Configuration in this
manual for details about platform configuration and the patient monitor’s user’s manual
for details about clinical configuration.
If loose parts or cable connections inside the patient monitor are suspected, disassemble the
patient monitor to a level needed to perform an internal visual check. Check that:
• all screws are tightened properly
• all cables are connected properly
• there are no loose objects inside the patient monitor
NOTE: Perform the electrical safety test and the checkout procedure every time you have
disassembled the patient monitor.
145
2106778-002
11.2 Webmin - Information tab

Access Webmin service interface to view configuration information and device information.
11.2.1 Configuration information

The Configuration Information module shows the current platform configuration of the patient
To view configuration information:
1. Log in to the Webmin.
2. Select the Information tab.
3. Select Configuration Information.
146
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
4. Scroll down the page to view the configuration information:

Configuration information
Host Information • Active software part number and version, Inactive
software part number and version, Host serial number,
Host asset number, MC Network IP address, IX Network IP
address, MC Network MAC address, IX Network MAC
address, S/5 Network virtual ID, CPU hardware version,
PMC hardware version, UIC hardware version, PMC
software version, UIC software version and EMBC
software version.
Host Hardware Information • Status information for E-Module Slots, Battery, Recorder,
WLAN, and Advanced I/O Board hardware options.
PDM License Information • PDM license option, status, and number of licenses.
Active Software License • Current monitor software license in use, status and
feature code.
Active Software Package • Current software package in use.
Host License Information • Each host license name, its current status (enabled,
disabled or trial), feature code, and the expiration date for
a trial license.
Default Clinical Settings • Current default clinical settings.
Admit Settings • Patient ID Prefix.
Unit and Bed Name • Unit name and Bed name for CARESCAPE Network.
E-Module Information • STP/TP/ST configuration information and P/PT/PP
configuration information from E- modules.
S/5 Printers • Printer name.
IX Printers • Printer name, hostname or IP address.
Printer Location Information • Printout type (Alarm Waveforms, Numeric Trends,
Reports, and Waveforms) and Printer location.
Remote Service • Proxy URL, Proxy port, Proxy username, Remote service
status, System ID, Serial number, Enterprises URL,
Enterprises tunnel URL, and Protocol.
Language • Clinical user interface language.
National Requirement • Setting for country specific alarms (None or France).
Network • Active configuration information, including MAC address,
MC Network type (IP address, Netmask, Gateway,
Destination IP address, Destination netmask, and PHY
configuration), and IX Network type (IP address, Netmask,
Gateway, DNS server 1, DNS server 2, and PHY
configuration).
147
2106778-002
Configuration information
ADT settings • Visit Number Query status, IX IP address of ADT server
Power Line Frequency • Current power line frequency setting in use.
MUSE/12SL • Location ID, Site number, MUSE web username, and
MUSE web URL.
WLAN • Wireless LAN configuration information, including WLAN
radio status, Antenna Diversity, Frequency Band, RTS
Threshold, Fragmentation Threshold, Applied QoS
Standard, WMM AC Parameters (for Voice, Video, Best
Effort, and Background), DSCP Settings (for Realtime
Clinical Traffic, Non-Realtime Clinical Traffic, and Non-
Realtime Non-Clinical Traffic), SSID, Authentication
method, Confidentiality method, and Key Index.
11.2.2 Device information

The Device Information module shows the hardware and software information of the patient
To view Device information:
1. Log in to the Webmin.
2. Select the Information tab.
3. Select Device Information.
4. Scroll down the page to view the device information:
Device information
Host Information • Active software part number and version, Inactive
software part number and version, Host serial number,
Host asset number, MC Network IP address, IX Network IP
address, MC Network MAC address, IX Network MAC
address, S/5 Network virtual ID, CPU hardware version,
PMC hardware version, UIC hardware version, PMC
software version, UIC software version and EMBC
software version.
Host Hardware Information • Status information for E-Module Slots, Battery, Recorder,
WLAN, and Advanced I/O Board hardware options.
Active Software License • Current monitor software license in use, status and
feature code.
Active Software Package • Current software package in use, status and feature
code.
Host License Information • Each host license name, its current status (enabled,
disabled or trial), feature code, and the expiration date for
a trial license.
148
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Device information
Acquisition Information - PDM • Active software version, Main board revision, DAS board
revision, Serial number, Asset number, MAC address, IP
address, Power frequency, ECG filter.
Acquisition Information - E- • Label, Software version, Control number, and Serial
Module number.
Installed S/5 Printers • Printer name.
Installed IX Printers • Printer name, hostname or IP address.
Printer Location Information • Printout type (Alarm Waveforms, Numeric Trends,
Reports, and Waveforms) and Printer location.
PDM License Information • PDM license option, status, and number of licenses.
UNITY ID Information • Product ID, Unity Network ID software number and
version, Date, Time, Device name and software version of
each device connected.
USB Port Information • Product name, Manufacturer, Vendor code, Product ID,
and Serial number.
11.3 Webmin - Diagnostics tab

Access Webmin service interface to view hardware statistics, ping a network device, view
WLAN diagnostics and view or download log files.
149
2106778-002
11.3.1 Hardware statistics
The Hardware Statistics module displays several internal voltages, temperatures and power
consumption. A value is displayed in red, if the current reading exceeds a pre-determined lower
or upper limit, A value is displayed either as “0” or as “--”, if it cannot be measured.
To access hardware statistics:
2. Select Diagnostics > Hardware Stats.
3. Scroll down the page to view the following device information:
The controlled parameters are measured with A/D converters and temperature sensors in the
specified subsystem. The measured values are then communicated over the I2C bus to the
power management controller in the DC/DC board for processing, except for CPU voltages,
which are both measured and processed by the CPU board.
Measurement Description
+ 1.5V CPU Core Voltage (in mV) These CPU core voltages are generated on the CPU
+ 1.8V CPU Core Voltage (in mV) board from the +3.3 V supplied by the DC/DC board.
+ 2.5V CPU Core Voltage (in mV)
+ 12 Vsync CPU Voltage (in mV) These voltages are generated for the ECG and Invasive
- 12 Vsync CPU Voltage (in mV) pressure analog outputs and marker-out
synchronization pulse. The voltages are measured from
the CPU board.
150
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
AC/DC voltage (mV) The AC/DC voltage is generated by the AC/DC power
supply unit and supplied as an input voltage to the DC/
DC board. The voltage is measured from the DC/DC
board. The AC/DC voltage is “0”, if the patient monitor is
not connected to the AC mains.
Also see section 11.4. Power management LEDs.
VSYS voltage (mV) These voltages are generated by the DC/DC board and
+15V MOD voltage (mV) they are routed via the CPU board to supply power to
+12V voltage (mV) other internal subsystems. The + 12 V is also supplied
+5V voltage (mV) directly to the backlight LED adapter boardLED backlight
+3.3V voltage (mV) of the LCD display. The +15VMOD voltage is “0”, if E-
module interface board is not installed. VSYS, +12V, +5V
and +3.3V voltages are measured from the DC/DC
board. +15VMOD is measured from the E-module
interface board. 
Also see section 11.4. Power management LEDs.
+5V REC voltage (mV) The +5 V REC and +12 V REC voltages are supplied for
+12V REC voltage (mV) the optional thermal recorder. The +5 V REC supply
voltage is generated in the recorder board by a step-
down converter from the + 12 V received from the DC/
DC board. The + 5 V REC and +12 V REC are measured
from the module frame flex board. These voltages are “-
-”, if recorder is not installed.
+15V MOD PSM voltage (mV) The +15 V MOD PSM voltage is supplied for the PSM
module. The voltage is measured from the module
frame flex board.
VSYS ePort voltage (mV) VSYS voltage is measured from the following locations:·
VSYS RACK voltage (mV) • The VSYS ePort voltage is supplied for a PDM module that is
VSYS EMOD (mV) connected to the PDM docking station. It is measured from
VSYS OPTION voltage (mV) the module frame flex board after the VSYS ePort circuit
breaker. The value is shown as “--” if PDM module is not
connected, or if VSYS OPTION voltage is enabled.
• The VSYS RACK voltage is measured from the module
frame flex board before the VSYS ePort circuit breaker.
• The VSYS EMOD voltage is measured from the E-module
interface board before the VSYS EMOD circuit breaker. The
VSYS EMOD voltage is shown as “--”, if the E-module
interface board is not installed.
• The VSYS OPTION voltage is supplied for a PDM module
that is connected to the ePort (DB9) interface in the
advanced interface board. It is measured from the
advanced interface board after the circuit breaker. The
value is shown as “--” if PDM module is not connected, or if
VSYS ePort voltage is enabled.
151
2106778-002
System power (mW) Power consumption is measured from the DC/DC board:
Module power (mW) • System power is the total power consumption of the
patient monitor taken from the AC/DC output or Battery.
The battery charging power is included in system power by
PMC CPU calculation.
• Module power describes the total power consumption of
the connected acquisition modules.
CPU temperature (°C) Temperature is measured from the:
DC/DC temperature (°C) • CPU board
EMOD temperature (°C) • DC/DC board
OPTION temperature (°C) • E-Module interface board
• Advanced interface board
The EMOD and OPTION temperatures are “0”, if the related
board is not installed.
11.3.2 Ping a TCP/IP network device

Use this Webmin feature to verify connectivity with a network device on the MC Network and IX
Network.
2. Select Diagnostics > Ping.
3. In the Address to Ping field in the Ping Command window, type the IP address of a known
device on the network and select ping.
If you receive a reply, then you are able to connect to the device.
If you do not receive a reply, make sure that the patient monitor is connected to an active
network.
The patient monitor withstands a maximum packet loss of 5 packets per 1 million and
maximum latency of 250 ms without performance degradation.
11.3.3 WLAN diagnostics

Use this Webmin feature for troubleshooting WLAN related problems. This Webmin module
provides information about the WLAN driver, WLAN status and the detected access points.
2. Select Diagnostics > WLAN.
3. Scroll down the page to view the following WLAN diagnostics information.
NOTE: Some WLAN data is not updated until the monitor connects to an access point.
Log Contents
WLAN Driver • Driver API Version
• Driver Version
• Firmware Version
• MAC Address
152
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Log Contents
WLAN Status • WLAN radio
• WLAN client IP Address
• Antenna diversity mode
• Center frequency (i.e., the current actual center frequency, which is
associated with the operating channel number used, e.g in the 2.4
GHz band on channel 6, the displayed frequency should be 2.437
GHz.)
• RTS Threshold
• Fragmentation Threshold
• Quality of Service:
- Applied QoS standard (i.e., None or WMM)
- QoS parameters (CWmin, CWmax, AIFS and TXOP) for each QoS
access category (Voice, Video, Best Effort, Background)
• The DSCP settings for network traffic types (Realtime Clinical Traffic,
Non-Realtime Clinical Traffic, Non-Realtime Non-Clinical Traffic)
• SSID (i.e., Service Set Identifier / network name)
• Security status:
- Authentication method (i.e., open)
- Confidentiality method (i.e., None, WEP-64, WEP-128, WPA-PSK
(TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP))
- Used Key Index (if WEP-64 or WEP-128 is used)
153
2106778-002
Log Contents
WLAN status • The current Association/Authentication status of the WLAN Radio:
Association/ Description of the state

Authentication state
Disconnected The WLAN client radio is not
authenticated or associated to any
network infrastructure.
Authenticating The network infrastructure is
authenticating the WLAN client radio.
Authenticated The WLAN client radio is authenticated
but not yet associated to the network
infrastructure.
Associating The WLAN client radio is in the process
of associating to the network
infrastructure.
Connected The WLAN client radio is connected to
the network infrastructure and data is
now being transmitted.
- Associated AP (BSSID) (i.e., the MAC Address of associated

Access Point)
• RF readings from the WLAN radio:
- Operating channel
- Transmit rate in Mbps
- Transmit power in mW
- Signal Level (RSSI) in terms of dBm. The minimum RSSI should be
-75dBm or greater to maintain application performance.
- Noise floor in dBm
- Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) in dB
WLAN Radio transmission information:
• Packets received
• Packets transmitted
• Bytes received
• Bytes transmitted
• Receiving errors
• Transmission errors
154
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Log Contents
Detected access The following information on maximum 8 detected Access Points on
points the same network (same SSID) is displayed:
• Signal Level (RSSI) in terms of dBm. Signal Level (RSSI) in terms of
dBm. The minimum RSSI should be -75dBmor greater to maintain
application performance.
• Operating channel number
• MAC Address
NOTE: If the patient monitor has associated with an Access Point,
information on only the corresponding Access Point will be displayed.
11.3.4 Log files

The patient monitor collects information about different system events and errors to log files.
These log files help troubleshooting problems in the patient monitor and the connected
peripheral devices.
The following table describes the available log files and the type of information that they
collect.
155
2106778-002
Log file name Contents

Webmin Action log • Webmin user authentication and access related information
(e.g., who accessed Webmin and when).
• Webmin module settings changes (e.g., what was changed
and when).
• Software transfer history information, including the type and
version of the transferred software, the origin and destination,
and the date and time the software transfer occurred.
• Host software activation information, including the host type
and serial number, the type and version of the activated host
software, and the date and time the host software activation
occurred.
• Module software activation information, including the module
type and serial number, the type and version of the activated
module software, and the date and time the module software
activation occurred.
• Settings transfer history information, including the type of the
transferred settings, the origin and destination, and the date
and time the settings transfer occurred.
• Log file transfer history information, including the type of log
that was transferred, the origin and destination, and the date
and time the log file transfer occurred.
• Webmin related error messages (e.g., information about EPI
layer issues detected by Webmin).
EMBC Frame logs • Date and time when the EMBC log was last updated.
• Modbus 0, 1, 2, and 3 information, including the following:
- System information (e.g., Sysinfo -packet)
- Log information (e.g., Loginfo -packet)
- Module node connection/disconnection information (e.g.,
Module Node Log)
- Module slot information (e.g., addresses and times in the
latest modbus frame)
- Modbus frame statistics (e.g., total number of frames,
number of synchronization errors, number of lost frames,
number of unknown frames)
PDM log All PDM errors and messages.
156
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Log file name Contents

System log • OS events and errors, including operating system related
information, such as clinical application startup and recovery
information, power on self-test results, etc.
• UIC, PMC, WLAN and battery events and errors.
• InSite RSvP events and errors, including InSite RSvP agent
related information.
Clinical log • Clinical-related application events, including module
(parameter) connections/disconnections, case starts/ends,
cold starts, warm starts, etc.
• Technical notes and errors displayed for clinical users,
including all host and module related technical errors (e.g.,
‘Failure in Agent ID’).
• Clinical alarms, including clinical application related patient
alarms and their level (e.g., ‘FiO2 Low’).
• Clinical user interactions, such as the host keystrokes and
touchscreen selections, menu setting changes, etc.
• EPI layer related errors, including information about EPI layer
issues detected by the clinical application.
• Host serial number and active software versions.
sGAS Log • All CARESCAPE Respiratory Module errors and messages. Each
log file contains two files, one for software error logs and one
for hardware error logs.
To download log files:

2. Select Diagnostics > Download Logs.
3. Select the log(s) you want to download.
4. Select Download.
a. If you are using Webmin on a service PC, you can save the log file to any storage device
connected to the service PC:
• In the File Download dialog box, select Save.
• In the Save as dialog box, select the destination drive and folder and select Save.
b. If you are using Webmin locally through the integrated browser, you can save the settings
file to a USB flash drive that is connected to one of the patient monitor's USB ports:
• The Download Logs window will show you the name of the created log file.
• Select Download to save the log file to the USB flash drive.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the USB storage device until downloading is complete.
6. Send this log file to GE Service for further investigation.
157
2106778-002
To download sGAS log files:

NOTE: To download sGAS logs, ensure that the module is connected to the monitor and the
patient is discharged.
2. Select Diagnostics > Download Logs > sGAS log.
3. Select Download sGAS Logs.
a. If you are using Webmin on a service PC, the log file is saved to the default download
folder of the service PC.
b. If you are using Webmin locally through the integrated browser, you can save the log file
to a USB flash drive that is connected to one of the patient monitor's USB ports:
• The name of the created log file is shown on the screen.
• Select Download to save the log file to the USB flash drive.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the USB storage device until downloading is completed.
5. Send the log file to GE Service for further investigation.
NOTE: The module is reset after you have downloaded the sGAS log. The reset takes up to 1
minute, as it calibrates the gas sensor and zeroes the measurement.
NOTE: To cancel the sGAS log download, you must admit a patient. When a patient is admitted,
the module is immediately reset. If you, for example, close the browser, the download
continues in the monitor and the module is reset only after that.
To view log files:

2. Select Diagnostics > View Logs.
3. Select the log file you want to view.
4. Select the information you want to view.
• For the Webmin Action Log, select the user, module, and timeframe and select
Search.
• For the other types of logs, select the link associated with the information you want
to view.
11.4 Power management LEDs

The DC/DC board includes troubleshooting LEDs that helps the user to troubleshoot start-up
related problems in the patient monitor.
The troubleshooting LEDs in the DC/DC board are visible through the ventilation holes in the
rear of the patient monitor (see picture below).
158
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
DC/DC board
ACDC +5 V
+12 V +3.3 V
+15 VMOD
On/standby
Power management
LEDs
LED Description
On/standby (red) The red on/standby LED should be lit momentarily when the on/standby
button is pressed. A lit LED normally indicates that the DC/DC power
supply board recognizes that the user has pressed the on/standby
button and should turn the patient monitor On/Off.
If the On/standby LED is not lit when the on/standby button is pressed,
check the patient monitor for any of the following problems:
• Faulty user interface board.
• User interface cable is not connected to CPU board.
• Faulty DC/DC board.
• Faulty CPU board.
ACDC (green) The green ACDC LED should be lit when the patient monitor is
connected to the AC mains, even if the patient monitor is in standby
mode. A lit LED indicates that the DC/DC board receives the 15.3-16
VDC from the AC/DC power supply unit.
If the ACDC LED is not lit when the patient monitor is connected to live
AC mains, check the patient monitor for one of the problems:
• Main fuses are blown.
• DC/DC cable is disconnected from DC/DC board.
• Faulty AC/DC power supply unit (especially, if the patient monitor operates
normally when it is battery powered).
• Faulty DC/DC board (especially if the patient monitor does not operate
neither on AC mains nor battery power).
159
2106778-002
LED Description
+ 12 V (yellow) These secondary voltages are created by the DC/DC board and they
should be lit when the patient monitor is turned On and operates
+ 15 VMOD (green)
normally.
+ 5 V (green) If one of the secondary voltages is not present (LED not lit) when the
+ 3.3 V (yellow) patient monitor is turned on with the on/standby button, the DC/DC
board is most likely faulty.
11.5 Network status LEDs

The interface board includes network status LEDs to help in troubleshooting network
connectivity and communication problems. These LEDs are located next to each network
connector in the rear of the patient monitor.
Standard Interface board Advanced Interface board
MC MCID NA IX
Link Activity A green, dual
LED LED purpose LED
(green) (green) (link & activity)
for each network
connector
Standard Interface Board

The Standard Interface Board has 2 indicator LEDs for the MC connector:
• The Link LED is lit, when the patient monitor is physically connected to a network.
• The Activity LED is lit when the patient monitor is either transmitting or receiving data
packets over the network.
Advanced Interface Board
The Advanced Interface Board has one dual purpose indicator LED for each network
connector:
• The LED is lit to indicate a Link, i.e., the patient monitor is physically connected to a
network.
• The LED is flashing to indicate Activity, i.e., the patient monitor is either transmitting or
receiving data packets over the network.
11.6 Battery diagnostics

You can check the monitor battery status from the Battery Status menu.
1. Select Monitor Setup > Battery Status
The Monitor Battery Status menu will open.
160
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Field Status Description

Time to empty hh:mm Estimated operating time before the battery is
(hh:mm) empty.
N/A Battery is not connected to the patient monitor
or battery is being charged.
Charge Level (%) XX Battery charge level compared to full capacity
(in percentage).
N/A Battery is not connected to the patient monitor.
Slot status "No battery" Battery is not connected to the patient monitor.
"No communication" Battery is connected to the patient monitor, but
battery communication failure error condition is
on.
"Failure" Battery error condition is on.
"Discharging" Patient monitor is operating on battery power.
"Charging" Patient monitor is connected to AC mains and
charging the battery.
"Full" Patient monitor is connected to AC mains and
battery is fully charged.
Time to full (hh:mm) hh:mm Estimated time to charge the battery to full
capacity.
N/A Battery is not connected to the patient monitor
or battery is being discharged.
Temperature "OK" Battery temperature is ok.
"Over temperature" Battery temperature error due to high battery
temperature.
"N/A" Battery is not connected to the patient monitor.
Battery Quality "OK" The full capacity of the battery is more than
50% compared to the full capacity of a new
battery.
"Condition" Battery requires conditioning.
"Replace" The full capacity of the battery is less than or
equal to 50% compared to the full capacity of a
new battery.
"N/A" Battery is not connected to the patient monitor.
2. For more detailed information, select Advanced tab.

Field Description
Remaining capacity (mAh) Remaining capacity of the battery in mAh.
Full capacity (mAh) Full capacity of the battery in mAh.
Full capacity compared to new (%) Full capacity of the battery compared to the
nominal full capacity of a new battery.
161
2106778-002
Field Description
Cycle count The total count of charging and discharging
cycles of the battery.
Voltage (V) Battery voltage.
Current (mA) Battery current. Positive when charging,
negative when discharging.
Temperature (°C or °F) Battery temperature.
NOTE: Refer to the Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for information about PDM
battery.
11.7 Error messages and codes

The following error messages display in the alarm area if there is a problem with the patient
monitor.
Refer to the patient monitor’s user’s manual for a complete list of system messages. Refer to
Module Frames and Modules Service Manual for a list of parameter module specific error
messages.
Message Possible causes Possible solutions

License expired A trial license has expired. Enable the license with a new
activation code, if needed.
Configuration Pending configuration Power cycle the patient monitor.
changes. Restart changes to platform settings
required that require patient monitor
restart.
Network down No other network device Verify that the patient monitor is
observed on the MC Network. connected to an active network.
Identical unit & bed A patient monitor with the Disconnect the patient monitor that
name noticed identical unit and bed name is has the identical unit and bed name.
on the network. or
Change the unit and bed name of the
duplicate patient monitor unit and bed
name.
Identical A patient monitor with the Disconnect the patient monitor that
IP address identical IP address is on the has the identical IP address.
noticed network. or
Change the IP address of the patient
monitor that has the duplicate IP
address.
162
2106778-002
Troubleshooting

Service Monitor One of the internal If temperature is too high:
Error Code temperature sensors indicate 1. Turn off the patient monitor.
0xHOST1001 the inside temperature of the 2. Let the patient monitor cool down.
patient monitor is out of 3. Check that the ventilation holes are
specification. The message not obstructed.
stays on screen as long as the 4. Ensure that the patient monitor is
error condition is valid. installed to a location that meets
the specified environmental
requirements of operating
temperature.
5. Investigate the patient monitor
thoroughly for potential short
circuits and other electrical faults.
6. If possible, log in to Webmin and
select Diagnostics> Hardware
Stats to identify the root cause for
the error message.
If temperature is too low (or high):
If the patient monitor has been
transported or stored outside the
operating temperature range, allow it
to stabilize back to operating
temperature range before applying
power.
Service Monitor One of the internal supply Log in Webmin and select Diagnostics
Error Code voltages is out of the > Hardware Stats to identify the supply
0xHOST1002 specification. The message voltage that is below or above the
stays on screen as long as the specification limit.
condition is valid.
Service Monitor Disk usage exceeds 90%. 1. Back up the clinical and platform
Error Code settings and print the licensing
0xHOST1004 information page via Webmin.
2. Re-install software.
Service Monitor The CPU timekeeper battery is Replace the CPU timekeeper battery.
Error Code empty.
0xHOST1100
163
2106778-002

External alarm 1. The USB cable between the 1. Reconnect the USB cable.
light disconnect. patient monitor and the
Check USB secondary display is
connection. disconnected when the
patient is admitted.
2. Secondary display turned to 2. Turn on the secondary display.
standby when the patient is
admitted.
NOTE: Select Audio Pause to acknowledge the message, if the USB
cable is disconnected or the secondary display turned off on purpose.
3. User interface board 3. Update UIC software (host software)
communication failure. or replace front unit assembly.
Power Power Management Update PMC software (host software)
management Controller (communication) or replace the DC/DC board.
failure failure.
Error 1: Unexpected failure in PMC Turn the monitor off and then on again.
PMC update failed. software update. If the error situation reoccurs, contact
Turn the monitor your local service representative.
off and then on
again.
Error 2: PMC software update to the The patient monitor shall be connected
PMC update DC/DC board has failed, to the AC mains. Plug in the power cord
requires a mains because the patient monitor and turn the monitor off and then on
supply. was running on battery again.
Plug in the power power.
cord and turn the
monitor off and
then on again.
Setting Service user has initiated a If required, the service user may cancel
activation after delayed settings activation the delayed setting activation. See
next case end./  that will automatically take section 7.16.4. Canceling pending
Setting place after next case end. / settings activation
activation after next discharge.
next discharge.
Software Service user has initiated a If required, the service user may cancel
activation after delayed software activation the delayed setting activation. See
next case end./  that will automatically take section 7.19.3. Canceling pending host
Software place after next case end / software activation
activation after next discharge.
next discharge.
Service Monitor Software activation failed. Reactivate software. If that does not
Activation Failed help, reinstall the software and then
reactivate it.
Setting activation failed. Reactivate settings.
164
2106778-002
Troubleshooting

Module • One of the supply voltages Log in to Webmin and select
voltage low for the acquisition Diagnostics > Hardware Stats to
modules is out of diagnose the problem. If there is a
specification. faulty board, replace it.
• An analog output voltage

is out of specification.
Application The operating system informs Select Audio Pause to acknowledge
error: that the Webmin local the message.
Webmin browser was terminated
abnormally.
Replace monitor The full capacity of the battery Replace the monitor battery with a new
battery is less than or equal to 50% one.
compared to the full capacity
of a new battery.
Battery failure Battery failure. Replace battery with a new one.
Condition monitor Battery needs conditioning. Condition the monitor battery. See
battery section 10.4.5. Conditioning a battery.
Battery Battery temperature error due Replace battery with a new one. If that
temperature high to faulty battery or battery does not help, replace the DC/DC
management error. board.
Speaker failure Speaker cable loose. Connect the speaker cable.
Speaker failure. Replace the speaker.
CPU tone generator or audio Replace the CPU board.
amplifier failure.
165
2106778-002
11.8 Problems and solutions

11.8.1 Start-up failures
Problem Possible causes Recommended actions

Failure to turn on the patient Power cord is loose. Ensure that the power cord is connected properly
monitor, when the following to the wall outlet and to the patient monitor.
conditions apply:
Blown fuses. Check the status of the fuses and replace them, if
- The patient monitor is necessary.
connected to AC mains.
- Use only fuses with correct rating.
- The Mains voltage
- If the fuses are blown repeatedly, investigate
indicator is not lit. (see
the patient monitor carefully for possible short
section “3.3.1”)
circuits.
- None of the power
management LEDs are Power cord is faulty. Check the power cord for wear and damage and
lit.(see section “11.4”) replace if necessary.
Unable to turn on the patient The power outlet does not Check the power outlet being used:
monitor when it is powered meet specified - Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental
from the AC mains. Monitor requirements. information manual for power requirements.
battery is not installed.
- Check the power outlet being used, see section
“8.2.2”.
The cable between the AC/ Check that the cable is intact and properly
DC power supply unit and connected to the AC/DC power supply unit and the
the DC/DC board is loose DC/DC board.
or faulty. NOTE: You can easily check if the cable is properly
connected to the DC/DC board by detaching the
top cover.
The cable between AC/DC Check that the cable is intact and properly
power supply unit and AC connected to the AC/DC power supply unit and to
inlet is loose or faulty. the AC inlet. Ensure the grounding connection is
good:
- Reconnect the cable, if loose.
- Replace the power supplyrear unit, if the cable
is faulty.
The AC/DC power supply is Replace the AC/DC power supply unit.
faulty.
The DC/DC board is faulty. Replace the DC/DC board.
166
2106778-002
Troubleshooting

Unable to turn on the patient Battery Empty Check the battery charge status, see section “6.1.1”.
monitor when it is powered Charge or replace the battery.
from the monitor battery.
Battery Failure or missing Check the status of the battery charge/failure
The patient monitor is not
battery. indicator, see section “6.1.1”. Depending on the LED
connected to the AC mains.
status:
- Insert a battery.
- Replace the battery.
Battery cable loose. Check that the battery cable is intact and properly
connected to the DC/DC board.
DC/DC Board failure. Replace the DC/DC board.
Failure to turn on the patient The cable between user Check the status of the red ON/Stdby-button LED
monitor, when the following interface board and CPU on DC/DC board when On/Stdby button is pushed.
conditions apply: board is loose or faulty. During the push LED should illuminate. If it is not
- The patient monitor is illuminating, the cable between the user interface
powered up either from board and DC/DC board is loose or faulty, or the
the AC mains or the user interface board is faulty.
battery. Check that the cable is intact and properly
- The red on/standby connected to the user interface board and the CPU
button LED in the DC/DC board.
board is not lit, when you - Reconnect the cable, if loose.
press the on/standby - Replace the user interface cable, if the cable is
button to start the faulty.
patient monitor. see
section “11.4”. The user interface board is Replace the front unit assembly.
faulty.
Unable to turn on the patient
monitor when it is both DC/DC Board failure. Replace the DC/DC board.
connected to AC mains and
CPU failure. The on/standby signal is routed through the CPU
a fully charged monitor
board, so there is a minor possibility that the CPU is
battery is installed.
faulty, if all the other things seems to work, but you
are not able to start the patient monitor neither
from the on/standby button or the remote-on
connector.
Multiple monitors that are The hospital network may 1. Temporarily switch the monitor from central
connected to the same have been incorrectly monitoring to local (bedside) monitoring by
network suddenly restart, configured, resulting in disconnecting the LAN cables from the IX/MC
but do not resume normal network overload. ports on the back panel of the monitor.
functionality within 90 2. Contact your IT department or other
seconds. appropriate personnel in your facility
responsible for the network.
3. After the network issue has been investigated
and resolved, switch the monitor back into
central monitoring by reconnecting the LAN
cables to the IX/MC ports.
4. Ensure that monitoring and alarm function are
working correctly.
167
2106778-002

Unable to turn on the patient Faulty DC/DC board. The The +12V voltage created by the DC/DC board is
monitor: DC/DC board does not used only for LCD display backlight and for the
- The patient monitor supply the +12V for the optional recorder. 
starts, but the primary LED backlight of the LCD Check one of the following:
display remains “black”, display. - Check the status of the yellow +12 V LED in the
i.e the backlight does not DC/DC board, see section “11.4”.
illuminate the LCD - Print something to the optional, built-in
display. recorder.
- Connect a service PC to the patient monitor and
log in to Webmin to check the status of the
+12V voltage (mV), see section “11.3.1”.
If the +12 V is present and within specs, the DC/DC
board is not likely to cause the problem.
The backlight cable Check that the backlight cable is intact and
between the LCD display properly connected both to the LCD display and to
and the DC/DC board is the DC/DC board.
loose or faulty.
or Replace the LCD display unit, if in doubt that the
The LED backlight unit is LED backlight unit is faulty.
faulty.
Unable to turn on the patient The display cable is Check that the display cable is intact and properly
monitor: damaged or loose. connected to the LCD display and the CPU board.
- The patient monitor The LCD display is faulty. Replace the LCD display unit.
starts, but the primary
display remains “white”, The display controller Replace the CPU board.
i.e., the backlight section of the CPU board is
illuminates the LCD faulty.
display, but nothing
appears on the screen.
No error messages.
168
2106778-002
Troubleshooting

Unable to turn on the patient 1. uDOM is missing or 1) Ensure that the uDOM is properly connected and
monitor: loose. aligned to the connector in the CPU board.
- The patient monitor 2. uDOM software is 2) Replace uDOM. Contact GE service for support.
starts, but the start-up corrupted.
3) Ensure that the attached uDOM has correct and
sequence does not 3. uDOM has
compatible software. Contact GE service for
advance beyond the GE incompatible software.
support.
logo screen. Error
messages may appear to
the screen.
Start-up sequence does not Active PMC software Perform the following steps:
advance beyond the GE logo version is the same as 1. Remove the batteries and power cord from the
screen. Error message Error inactive PMC version. patient monitor.
3: PMC update failed. 2. Wait 10 seconds
appears to the screen. 3. Re-install the batteries and plug the power cord
back to the monitor.
4. Turn the monitor on and wait until the monitor
restarts automatically.
Webmin login screen There is no host software Transfer and activate host software to monitor, see
appears after the startup in uDOM. section 7.18 or replace the uDOM. Contact GE
screen. service for support.
11.8.2 User interface issues

Secondary display
Problem Possible cause Recommended actions
Continuous beeping alarm and Mains supply is lost or the USB Restore the mains supply or reconnect
alarm light flashing yellow. cable is disconnected. the USB cable.
Touchscreen
Problem Possible cause Recommended actions
Touchscreen operation Touchscreen not calibrated. Calibrate touchscreen, see section “7.1.2”.
inaccurate.
Touchscreen inoperative. Touchscreen cable loose Connect touchscreen cable to the user
interface board.
Faulty touchscreen sensor. Replace the front unit assembly.
Trim Knob, on/standby button and alarm Light issues

Problem Possible cause Recommended action
None of the user interface UI cable loose or faulty. Check user interface cable and replace it,
board functions work, see if necessary.
section “9.2.3”.
UI board faulty. Replace the front unit assembly.
169
2106778-002
Trim Knob (only) is inoperative. Trim Knob cable loose. Connect Trim Knob encoder cable to the
user interface board.
Trim Knob encoder faulty. Replace the Trim Knob encoder.
The power indicator LEDs are User interface board is faulty. Replace the front unit assembly.
inoperative.
Alarm light does not illuminate Alarm light cable is loose Connect the alarm light cable to the user
when there is an alarm interface board.
condition on (audible alarms
Alarm light board or alarm light Replace the front unit assembly.
work and alarm message is
cable is faulty.
visible)
Alarm light does not illuminate “Warm start” It is less than 15 minutes since the last
during power-on self test. power-up (warm start) and this normal
operation.
The alarm light illuminates during the
power-on self test only if it is a cold start
(more than 15 minutes from the previous
start-up).
Alphanumeric Keyboard and barcode scanner issues

Wrong character is displayed The keyboard locale is not Configure the keyboard locale correctly,
when a key is pressed on configured correctly. see “7.9”.
keyboard.
Wrong character is displayed The keyboard locale is not Configure the keyboard locale correctly,
when a barcode is read. configured correctly. see “7.9”.
The barcode reader’s language Refer to the barcode reader manual.
configuration is incorrect.
Barcode reader does not read a Barcode reader parser Configure the barcode settings, see
multi-field barcode correctly. configuration is incorrect. “7.7.2”.
(i.e., the information is not
The barcode reader is Check the barcode information content
populated correctly to the fields
incompatible with the parser and compare it to the current parser
in the Admit menu).
configuration (field lengths, field configuration.
types, delimiters, symbologies
etc.).
170
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Speaker / audible alarm issues

Audible alarms do not work. Audible alarms are turned off Enable audible alarms.
(See Alarms Setup > Audible &
Visual.)
Alarm volume is low. Adjust alarm volume (Monitor Setup >
Sound Volumes).
Speaker failure Replace the speaker unit.
Speaker cable loose or faulty. Check that the speaker cable is intact and
properly connected.
Tone generator or audio Replace CPU board .
amplifier failure
11.8.3 Incorrect system time

System time is incorrect when CPU timekeeper battery empty Replace CPU timekeeper battery.
patient monitor is not
connected to network.
Time not configured properly Configure date and time, see “7.2.5”.
System time is incorrect when Network device time When adding a new device to the
patient monitor is connected to synchronization error. CARESCAPE Network, the existing devices
MC Network. on the CARESCAPE Network will
synchronize to the new device’s time. To
prevent potential time synchronization
issues, you should set the new device’s
time to be as close as possible to the time
(within one minute or less) used by the
existing GE devices on the CARESCAPE
Network.
System time is incorrect when iCentral time incorrect. Configure iCentral time master.
patient monitor is connected to
S/5 network.
171
2106778-002
11.8.4 License issues

Unable to perform a function or - A license has not been See License management chapter.
a feature is not available. purchased for the feature.
- The trial license has expired
for the feature.
- The license is not installed
properly.
Unable to view a certain feature The software package in use 1. Log in to Webmin > Configuration >
although the license is enabled. does not include the feature in Licenses > Software Package.
question. (For example, 2. Select the correct option and select
Anesthetic agent measurement Activate..
is not supported by ICU software
package).
Unable to upload a license file. - The license file is corrupted. Log in to Webmin > Configuration >
- The license file is for a patient Licenses.
monitor with a different serial - If you have printed license information,
number. select Software Package and Host
Licensing.
- If you have a license file, select Upload
License.
The wrong software application The wrong software application 1. To view the software package that is
is displayed on the patient is activated for the device. currently activated, Log in to Webmin
monitor. > Configuration > Licenses > Host
Licensing.
2. Make sure that the desired software
application is displayed under
Currently Active Software Package.
3. If you need to activate a different
software package, access
Configuration > Licenses > Software
Package.
4. Select the correct option and select
Activate..
172
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
11.8.5 Recorder issues

Recorder does not work. Graph location is not configured Check the configuration: Monitor Setup >
correctly. Printing > Devices > Setup.
Recorder board failure. Check the status of the +5 V REC and +12
V REC voltages, see section “11.3.1”
Hardware statistics.
If one of these above voltages is out of
spec, but the +12 V exists in the DC/DC
board, the recorder board is most likely
faulty. Replace the recorder unit.
Recorder does not work. Recorder failure. Replace the recorder unit.
CPU board failure The serial communication for the recorder
is managed by the EMBC section of the
CPU board.
- Check EMBC Frame logs for possible
EMBC failures (see section “11.3.4”).
If the cause is none of the above, the
problem is most likely in the CPU board.
Replace the CPU board.
Recorder works but nothing Paper installed upside down. Turn the paper roll over.
appears on the paper. To test which side is active:
- Place the paper on a hard surface and
draw a line with a fingernail - a dark
line will appear on the active (thermal)
side.
11.8.6 Acquisition module problems

Problem: an acquisition module does not work with the patient monitor.
Locate first whether the problem is in the patient monitor or in the acquisition module:
1. Connect another, similar, known good module to the suspect patient monitor and check if
the module works normally:
 “Yes” => The suspect module is most likely faulty. Refer to Module Frames and
Modules Service Manual for troubleshooting instructions.
 “No” => The problem is most likely in the patient monitor. Continue troubleshooting
the problem according to the related troubleshooting chart below.
OR
Connect the suspect acquisition module to another, similar, known good patient monitor and
check if the module works normally:
 “Yes” => The problem is most likely in the patient monitor. Continue troubleshooting
the problem according to the related troubleshooting chart below.
 “No” => The suspect module is most likely faulty. Refer to Module Frames and
Modules Service Manual for troubleshooting instructions.
173
2106778-002
E-module issues
Possible cause Recommended action

Incompatible module Refer to the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual document
to see the list of compatible modules.
DC/DC board failure The supply voltages for the E-module interface board are generated in the
DC/DC board. Check that these supply voltages are within specs, see
section “11.3.1” Hardware statistics for:
- VSYS voltage (mV)
- +15V MOD voltage (mV)
If any of the output voltages are out of spec, the problem is most likely in the
DC/DC board. Replace the DC/DC board.
The hinge flex board is loose or Check that the hinge flex board is intact and properly connected to the CPU
faulty. board and to the E-module Interface board.
E-Module interface board failure. The E-module interface board creates the supply voltages
+ 15 VD, + 15 Va, - 15Va and + 5 Vmod) for the connected E-modules.
Replace E-module interface board, if suspected faulty.
CPU board failure The RS-485 communication for the E-modules is managed by the EMBC
section of the CPU board.
- Check EMBC Frame logs for possible EMBC failures, see section “11.3.4”.
If the cause is none of the above, the problem is most likely in the CPU
board. Replace the CPU board.
PSM module issues

Pole mount cable loose or faulty (if Check that the Module Bus Adapter for PSM and the connection cable is
the PSM module is mounted to a intact and properly connected to the PSM module mounted to the IV pole
pole mount) and to the PSM connector in the patient monitor.
DC/DC board failure The +15VMOD supply voltage for the PSM module is generated in the DC/
DC board. Check that it is within specs, see section “11.3.1” for:
- +15VMOD voltage (mV)
If +15VMOD voltage is out of spec, the problem is most likely in the DC/DC
board. Replace the DC/DC board.
The hinge flex board is loose or Check that the hinge flex board is intact and properly connected to the
faulty. CPU board and to the module frame flex board.
The module frame flex board is Check the status of the +15 VMod PSM voltage, see section “11.3.1”
loose or faulty. Hardware statistics.
If the +15 VMod PSM voltage is out of spec, but the +15VMod exists in the
DC/DC board and hinge flex board is good, the problem is most likely in the
module frame flex board.
174
2106778-002
Troubleshooting

CPU board failure The RS-485 communication for the E-modules is managed by the EMBC
section of the CPU board.
- Check EMBC Frame logs for possible EMBC failures, see section “11.3.4”.
PDM module issues

The external ePort cable is loose Check that the external ePort cable is intact and properly connected to the
or defectice. PDM module and to the ePort connector in the advanced interface board.
(PDM is connected to the ePort

connector in advanced interface
board)
DC/DC board failure The VSYS supply voltage for the PDM module is generated in the DC/DC
board. Check from the Webmin Hardware Statistics that the supply
voltages are within specification:
- VSYS voltage (mV)
- VSYS_EPORT(mV)
- VSYS_PDM (mV)
If PDM is connected to PDM dock, DC/DC board should identify PDM and
enable the VSYS_PDM circuit breaker on CPU carrier board to connect
VSYS voltage to VSYS_PDM.
If PDM is connected to ePORT, DC/DC board should identify PDM and
enable the VSYS_EPORT circuit breaker on CPU carrier board to connect
VSYS voltage to VSYS_EPORT.
If VSYS voltage is out of spec, the problem is most likely in the DC/DC
board. Replace the DC/DC board.
Advanced interface board failure.  Check the status of the VSYS OPTION voltage measured from the
 advanced interface board (see section “11.3.1” Hardware statistics).
(PDM is connected to the ePort 
connector in advanced interface If the VSYS OPTION voltage is out of spec, but the VSYS voltage exists in the
board) DC/DC board, the problem is most likely in the advanced interface board.
Replace the advanced interface board.
175
2106778-002

Hinge flex board is loose or faulty. Check that the hinge flex board is intact and properly mounted to the CPU
board and to the module frame flex board.
(PDM is connected to the PDM
docking station)
Module frame flex board faulty. Check the status of the VSYS RACK and VSYS ePort, see section “11.3.1”
Hardware statistics.
(PDM is connected to the PDM If the VSYS RACK and VSYS ePort voltage is out of spec, but the VSYS exists
docking station) in the DC/DC board, the problem is most likely in the module frame flex
board.
CPU board failure The Ethernet communication for the PDM module is managed by the CPU
board.
Check PDM Log for possible PDM errors messages, see section “11.3.4”.
11.8.7 CARESCAPE Network communication issues

Traffic types
Two main types of communication occur in the CARESCAPE Network: Broadcast and Unicast.
• Broadcast traffic is sent from one device to all devices on the network. Examples of
CARESCAPE broadcast traffic are device discovery, alarms, and time synchronization.
• Unicast traffic is sent from one device to another specific device on the network. An
example of CARESCAPE unicast traffic is patient waveforms.
Flow
• Upstream broadcast: The patient monitor sends broadcasts to other network devices.
• Downstream broadcast: The patient monitor receives broadcasts from other network
devices.
176
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
177
2106778-002
Problem: No waveforms or parameters are displayed at the

CARESCAPE Central Station
178
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
179
2106778-002
11.8.8 S/5 Network communication issues

Check the following things before proceeding with any detailed network troubleshooting:
• Check status of the wired and wireless network connection indicators and the WLAN
signal strength indicator, for reference see “3.8”.
• Check status of network status LEDs. Check network compatibility. Refer to the patient
monitor’s supplemental information manual.
• Check that each patient monitor has been assigned a unique Virtual ID key, see “7.2.3”.
Wired S/5 network
Bedside monitor doesn’t The problem is related to the • Proceed to the iCentral
register to the Monitor Network iCentral, or to the cabling troubleshooting.
- all bedside monitors affected. between the iCentral and the • Check the cabling between
hub/switch. the iCentral and the hub/
switch.
Bedside monitor doesn’t The problem is related to the • Check the patient monitor(s)’
register to the Monitor Network bedside monitor, or to the network configuration.
– only one patient monitor or cabling between the bedside • Check the cabling between
some of the bedside monitors monitor and the hub/switch. the bedside monitors and the
affected. hub.
The problem is related to • Check the iCentral network

network setup: the bedside setup.
monitor(s) is/are missing from
the network setup.
The problem is related to view • Check the iCentral view setup.
setup: the bedside monitor(s) is/
are missing from the view setup.
180
2106778-002
Troubleshooting
Wireless S/5 network.

No wireless connection - the Patient monitor is out of wireless • Contact the hospital IT
patient monitor does not coverage area. department to check the
associate/authenticate with the wireless coverage area.
Access Point, see section WLAN radio is disabled. • Enable WLAN radio, see
“11.3.3” for WLAN diagnostics. section “7.2.4”.
Incompatible wireless network • Check that the patient monitor

infrastructure. is installed to the appropriate
wireless network
infrastructure (IEEE 802.11b).
SSID mismatch between patient • Enter correct SSID, see section

monitor and access point. “7.2.4”.
Security settings mismatch • Contact the hospital IT

between patient monitor and department for correct
access point: security settings and then
update the patient monitor
• Incorrect or incompatible configuration, see section
confidentiality method “7.2.4”.
• Incorrect Pass Key • Check that the used security
• Incorrect key index method is none, WEP-64 or
WEP-128.
• Select correct confidentiality
method.
• Ensure Pass Key used is
correct.
• Select correct key index.
Access control list is in use in the • Contact the hospital IT

access point. The patient monitor department to update the
is blocked out. access control.
181
2106778-002
For your notes:
182
2106778-002
Disassembly and reassembly
12 Disassembly and reassembly

12.1 Disassembly guidelines
Field repair of the patient monitor is limited to replacing Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). See
chapter 13. Service parts for a detailed list of available FRUs. Attempting a field repair on a
printed circuit board, or a factory sealed component or assembly could jeopardize the safe and
effective operation of the monitor.
NOTE: Only a qualified service technician should perform field replacement procedures.
NOTE: Perform the checkout procedure described in chapter 10. Maintenance and checkout
always after doing any disassembly of the patient monitor.
12.1.1 ESD precautions

All external connectors of the patient monitor are protected against ESD damage. However
during service of the patient monitor, exposed components and assemblies inside the patient
monitor are susceptible to ESD damage. Human hands, non-ESD protected work stations or
improperly grounded test equipment can cause ESD damage. The following guidelines do not
fully guarantee static-free workstation, but can greatly reduce the potential for failure of any
electronic assemblies being serviced:
• Discharge any static charge you may have built up before handling semiconductors or
assemblies containing semiconductors.
• A grounded, antistatic wristband or heel strap should be worn at all times while handling
or repairing assemblies containing semiconductors.
• Use properly grounded test equipment.
• Use a static-free work surface while handling or working on assemblies containing
semiconductors.
• Semiconductors and electronic assemblies should be stored only in antistatic bags or
boxes.
• Handle all PCB assemblies by their edges.
• Do not remove semiconductors or assemblies containing semiconductors from antistatic
containers until absolutely necessary.
• Do not slide semiconductors or electrical/electronic assemblies across any surface.
• Do not touch semiconductor leads unless absolutely necessary.
• Do not flex or twist a circuit board.
WARNING Pins of connectors identified with the ESD warning symbol should not be
touched. Connections should not be made to these connectors unless
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions are used.
12.1.2 Reassembly precautions

Pay attention to the following precautions when reassembling the monitor:
• Note the positions of any wires, cables or connectors. Mark them, if necessary, to ensure
their correct reassembly.
• Save and set aside all hardware for reassembly
183
2106778-002
• GE recommends using the new fasteners (screws, washers, etc.) in the FRU kits rather
than reusing the old fasteners. Some fasteners are not intended to be re-used more than
three times.
• Use only new screws when attaching parts into light metal parts. Before fastening a
screw, turn it counterclockwise until it drops into an existing thread pattern.
• The maximum torque values for use with each screw and nut in reassembly are shown in
brackets in the end of each disassembly step.
• When attaching self-tapping screws to light metal parts without existing threads (new
light metal FRU parts), you should use a higher torque than is recommended for
reassembled parts, but still not more than 1.6 Nm.
12.1.3 Required tools
- insulated crosshead screwdriver

- insulated Torx T10 screwdriver
- insulated flat blade screwdriver (width 2.5 mm
/ 0.1 in)
- pliers
- antistatic ESD wristband
- spanner size 11 mm
WARNING Due to possible high voltage present, use an insulated screwdriver at all
times.
12.1.4 Before disassembly

WARNING PATIENT MONITORING INTERRUPTION — Make sure a patient is not being
monitored while servicing the equipment.
WARNING DISCONNECTION FROM MAINS - When disconnecting the device from the
power line, remove the plug from the wall outlet first. Then you may
disconnect the power cord from the device. If you do not observe this
sequence, there is a risk of coming into contact with line voltage by
inserting metal objects, such as the pins of leadwires, into the sockets of the
power cord by mistake.
WARNING SAFETY GROUND - Remove power cord from the mains source by grasping
the plug. Do not pull on the cable.
WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK - Always unplug the grounded cables when not in use.
Leaving them connected could result in an electric shock from the ground
contact in the other end.
1. Turn the monitor off from the On/standby button.

2. Disconnect the monitor power cord, first from the wall outlet and then from the monitor.
184
2106778-002
3. Remove the battery. Unlock the battery cover by turning the battery cover lock 90°
clockwise and pull the battery out.
4. Disconnect all external cables connected to the monitor.
5. Detach all parameter modules from the Module Frame.
6. Detach the monitor from the mount if installed.
When re-installing the battery, make sure that the charge level indicator LEDs are facing
upwards and push the battery in all the way. Close the battery cover lock by turning it 90°
counter-clockwise.
Disassembly workflow
Use this workflow diagram to find the simplest way to disassemble the required parts of the
monitor. Numbers in the diagram refer to the sections in this chapter.

Follow the arrows from the top down to the required part and disassemble the monitor by
following the steps in between.
12.2.1 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4

Side
Module frame Fuses Interface frame housing Top cover
front cover board decorations
12.2.2 12.2.3 12.4.5

Recorder PDM docking 12.3.5 Disassemble the main unit into WLAN
unit mechanism front main unit and rear unit
12.2.4 12.4.1
Module frame cover unit Rear unit Front main unit Front unit assembly
12.2.5 12.3.6 12.3.8 12.3.7 12.4.2 12.4.3
B650-02_disassembly_steps_24.vsd
E-module uDOM DC/DC CPU LCD display Trim Knob
interface board board battery unit encoder
12.2.6 12.3.10 12.3.9 12.4.4

Module frame AC/DC CPU board Front Unit
assembly board Assembly FRU
Rear unit assembly 12.3.11 Base unit
185
2106778-002
12.2 Module frame disassembly

12.2.1 Detaching the module frame front cover
A) Monitors with the E-module option

1. Press down the Module Frame release knob
and turn the Module Frame to a 90° angle, so
that the Module Frame faces to the front.
2. Release the two snaps on the top of the cover

unit:
- press (strongly) with your thumb on the
middle of the Module Frame cover unit's
front edge.
- pull out the front cover a little with the
other hand.
3. Release the four snaps in the inner side of the

E-module slot by pressing them (inwards) with
your finger. Release first the topmost two
snaps and then the lowest two snaps.
4. Detach the cover unit.
186
2106778-002
B) Monitors without the E-module option

that the Module Frame faces to the front.
2. Release the two snaps on the top of the cover

unit:
- press (strongly) with your thumb on the
middle of the Module Frame cover unit's
front edge.
- pull out the front cover a little with the
other hand.
3. Press with finger from the top of the PDM

docking rail.
187
2106778-002
4. Shift the front cover slightly down and to the

left by pulling the hole in the bottom plate to
release the two snaps on left side and one on
the right side of the front cover.
5. Detach the cover unit.
188
2106778-002
12.2.2 Detaching the Recorder Unit

Disassemble first:
a. 12.2.1. Detaching the module frame front cover
1. Open the recorder door and remove the paper

roll if installed.
2. Unscrew the two crosshead screws inside the
recorder. Note that the screws cannot be
removed. Torque [1.2 Nm]
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the Hinge Flex
Board on the right of the recorder.
3. Pull the recorder carefully out of the Module

Frame.
NOTE: If you find it difficult to detach you also can
detach the recorder by removing the Modules
Frame cover unit, see section 12.2.4.
4. Release the snaps in the recorder EMC cover

with a flat blade screwdriver while
simultaneously pulling the bottom plate of the
EMC cover.
5. Pull the EMC cover with the recorder board
out of the Module Frame.
189
2106778-002
When reassembling, the recorder unit can be installed into the Module Frame as a whole.
NOTE: Ensure that the recorder unit is firmly installed to the recorder connector and both snaps in the EMC
cover lock properly.
12.2.3 Detaching the PDM docking mechanism

Disassemble first:
1. Release the two latches on the inner left side

of the Module Frame by first pressing the
snaps and then sliding the latches towards
you.
2. Turn the PDM Docking Mechanism to a 30°

angle to detach it from the Module frame flex
board connector.
• Reassemble in reverse order.
190
2106778-002
12.2.4 Detaching the Module Frame cover unit

Disassemble first:
b. 12.2.3. Detaching the PDM docking mechanism, if installed.
1. Release the two snaps inside the holes of the

frame cover using a flat blade screwdriver.
2. Pull the cover backwards to detach it.
191
2106778-002
12.2.5 Detaching the E-module Interface Board

Disassemble first:
b. 12.2.3. Detaching the PDM docking mechanism
c. 12.2.4. Detaching the Module Frame cover unit
1. Detach the Module Frame back plate. 

Release the snaps with a flat blade
screwdriver and detach the plate.
2. Disconnect the Hinge Flex Board from the

Module Frame connectors.
NOTE: Handle the flex board with care when
disconnected. Do not twist it or bend it down.
3. Remove the six T10 screws mounting the

E-module Interface Board. Torque [0.6 Nm]
NOTE: When reassembling, do not use excessive
force to avoid damaging the plastic threads.
4. Detach the board from the Module Frame

unit. Pay attention to the connector on the left
side of the board.
192
2106778-002
12.2.6 Detaching the Module Frame assembly

Disassemble first:
b. 12.2.3. Detaching the PDM docking mechanism
c. 12.2.4. Detaching the Module Frame cover unit
d. 12.2.5. Detaching the E-module Interface Board: steps 1 and 2 only.
1. Remove the T10 screw. Torque [0.6 Nm]
2. Release the snap behind the flex cable.

Lift the flap with a flat blade screwdriver.
3. Pull the Module frame Assembly to detach it
from the Module Frame wall.
NOTE: When reassembling, check that the
connector is intact.
193
2106778-002
12.3 Main unit disassembly

12.3.1 Replacing the mains fuses
The mains fuses are situated on the back of the

monitor, below the mains connector.
1. Lever the screwdriver against the cable holder
to release the fuse holder and pull it out of the
frame.
2. Pull the fuses out of the fuse holder and insert

new ones. Use only fuses with the same
rating.
3. Push the fuse holder all the way in until it

snaps to its place.
194
2106778-002
12.3.2 Detaching the Interface Board
1. Detach the Interface Board cover plate from

the frame by releasing the snaps with a flat
blade screwdriver.
2. Remove the six T10 screws that hold the

Interface Board to the main unit. 
[Torque 0.8 Nm]
NOTE: At first reassemble the screws in the
middle.
3. Pull the Interface Board out of the main unit

with pliers.
NOTE! Pull with the pliers from the plate on the
interface board panel.
195
2106778-002
12.3.3 Detaching the Frame Side Housing Decorations
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the decoration

while disassembling.
1. To detach the Right Frame Housing

Decoration:
- Release the snaps at the bottom part of the
decoration with a flat blade screwdriver.
- Lift the decoration a little more to release the
rest of the snaps and detach the decoration.
2. To detach the Left Frame Housing Decoration:

- Release the snap at the bottom part of the
decoration by pressing it down with a flat
blade screwdriver.
- Lift the decoration a little more to unlock the
rest of the snaps and detach the decoration.
196
2106778-002
12.3.4 Detaching the Top Cover

that the Module Frame slot faces to the front.
2. Remove the T10 screw located behind the

Module Frame. [Torque 0.8 Nm]
3. Detach the Top Cover by releasing the four
snaps with a flat blade screwdriver.
Reassemble in reverse order.

Grease the rubber gasket of Top Cover to
reassemble it smoothly.
197
2106778-002
12.3.5 Disassembling the main unit into Rear and Front units
Disassemble first:
a. 12.3.2. Detaching the Interface Board
b. 12.3.3. Detaching the Frame Side Housing Decorations
c. 12.3.4. Detaching the Top Cover
1. Set the monitor lying on its back and remove

the two screws (T10) from the bottom.
[Torque 0.8 m]
- NOTE: Be careful not to break the PDM
docking mechanism. Consider detaching it
according to section 12.2.3.
2. Set the rear side of the Main Unit facing you.

3. Remove the three T10 screws from the left
side. [Torque 0.8 Nm]
4. Remove the two T10 screws from the right
side next to the Module Frame hinges. [Torque
0.8 Nm].
5. Detach the Module Frame back plate and

disconnect the Hinge Flex Board from the
Module Frame connectors, 
see section 12.2.5.
NOTE: Handle the Hinge Flex Board with care
when disconnected. Do not twist it or bend it
down.
6. Carefully lead the Hinge Flex Board through
the opening, and turn the Module Frame
against the main unit.
198
2106778-002
7. Pull the Front Unit away from the rear unit just
enough so that you can detach the DC/DC
cable from the DC/DC Board.
NOTE: When reassembling, check that the cable
is connected properly.
8. Detach the rear unit from the Front Unit.

NOTE: The Front Unit is unstable when detached
from the Rear Unit and may easily tilt forward.
199
2106778-002
12.3.6 Detaching the uDOM

Disassemble first:
d. 12.3.5. Disassembling the main unit into Rear and Front units
1. Detach the uDOM from the CPU connector.
NOTE: uDOM, disk on module is the permanent

memory of the patient monitor. The software,
licenses and clinical and service configurations
are stored to the uDOM.
uDOM replacement:
Contact GE Service if you doubt that the uDOM is defective and needs to be replaced. Some of the
configuration steps required after uDOM replacement can be performed only by GE service.
Provide the following information:
a) Monitor Type
b) Serial Number
c) Software version installed, if available.
200
2106778-002
12.3.7 Replacing the CPU timekeeper battery

Disassemble first:
1. Detach the CPU timekeeper battery from the

CPU board with a flat blade screwdriver.

• To avoid network device time synchronization issues, remember to readjust the time and date before you
connect the monitor to network. For details, see 7.3. Setting time and date.
NOTE: Dispose of the battery according to local, state or country laws.
201
2106778-002
12.3.8 Detaching the DC/DC board

Disassemble first:
1. Disconnect the Battery cable and the

Backlight cable from the DC/DC Board.
2. Remove the three T10 screws that hold the
DC/DC Board to the mid-frame.
3. Disconnect the DC/DC Board from the CPU
board connector.
4. Detach the DC/DC Board.
Backlight
cable
CPU
connector
DC/DC board
Battery
cable
When reassembling:
- Assemble the CPU Board first if detached.
- Connect the Battery cable.
- Slide the DC/DC board to connect the CPU connector.
- NOTE: Do not bend the DC/DC board when reassembling.
- Connect the Backlight Inverter cable and the three T10 screws. [Torque 0.8 Nm].
Reassemble the Rear Unit and the Front Unit in reverse order.
NOTE: After replacing the DC/DC Board, during the first start-up, the patient monitor will automatically check
the UIC software version in the replaced DC/DC board and update the software if necessary. Wait for 5
minutes to see if the software update is initiated and do not interrupt the process.
202
2106778-002
12.3.9 Detaching the CPU Board

Disassemble first:
e. 12.3.8. Detaching the DC/DC board
1. Detach the WLAN card from the CPU if

installed.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the antenna
cables.
2. Detach the uDOM.
IMPORTANT: Detach the original uDOM and
Display Hinge attach it to the new CPU Board.
cable Flex
cable The software, licenses and clinical and service
configurations are stored in the uDOM.
3. Detach the Hinge Flex Board and the Display
Cable from the CPU Board.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the Hinge Flex
Board.
4. Detach the Sync cable, the Loudspeaker
cable, and the U/I cable from the CPU Board.
5. Remove the nine T10 screws that hold the
CPU Board to the mid-frame.
6. Detach the CPU Board. [Torque 0.8 Nm]
uDOM
UI cable Loudspeaker Sync

cable cable
- Insert the WLAN card into the card slot.
- Place the antenna cables carefully inside the cover.
NOTE: Center align the user interface cable carefully to the connector in the CPU Board and/or User Interface
Board.
Note the alignment pins to set the CPU Board in the right place.
NOTE: After replacing the CPU Board, during the first start-up, the patient monitor will automatically check the
EMBC software version in the replaced CPU Board and update the software if necessary. Wait for 5 minutes to
see if the software update is initiated and do not interrupt the process.
203
2106778-002
12.3.10 Detaching the AC/DC board and rear unit assembly

Disassemble first:
B650 frame with product code SK4:
1. Detach the DC/DC cable from the cable

holder.
2. Detach the AC/DC cable and the protective
earth cable from the AC/DC board. 
Use pliers, if needed.
3. Remove the four T10 screws that attach the
AC/DC board to the mounting plate [Torque
0.4 Nm].

- Attach the four screws that mount the AC/DC board to the mounting plate.
- Reconnect the AC/DC cable and the protective earth cable to the AC/DC board.
- Place the DC/DC cable in the cable holder.
204
2106778-002
B650 frame with product code SS6 and SQC:
1. Detach the DC/DC cable from the cable

holder.
2. Detach the AC/DC cable and the protective
earth cable from the AC/DC board. 
Use pliers, if needed.
3. Remove the four T10 screws that attach the
AC/DC board to the rear unit assembly.

- Attach the four screws that mount the AC/DC board to the rear unit assembly.
- Reconnect the AC/DC cable and the protective earth cable to the AC/DC board.
- Place the DC/DC cable in the cable holder.
205
2106778-002
12.3.11 Replacing the rear unit assembly

Disassemble first:
e. 12.3.10. Detaching the AC/DC board and rear unit assembly
B650 frame with product code SK4:
1. Remove the T10 screw that attaches the

housing back cover to the rear unit assembly
[Torque 0.8 Nm].
2. Release the four snaps that are located on
both sides of the AC/DC board.
3. Detach the housing back cover from the rear

unit assembly.
NOTE: Be careful when detaching the back cover.
The loose cable clamp and spring may fall out.
206
2106778-002
B650 frame with product code SS6 and SQC:
1. Remove the T10 screw (below the power inlet)

that attaches the housing back cover to the
rear unit assembly [Torque 0.8 Nm].
2. Release the four snaps that are located on
both sides of the AC/DC board.
3. Detach the housing back cover from the rear

unit assembly.
NOTE: Be careful when detaching the back cover.
The loose cable clamp and spring may fall out.

- Ensure the cable clamp and the spring are in place.
- Reattach the housing back cover so that the four snaps lock.
- Attach the T10 screw that mounts the housing back cover to the new rear unit assembly without any
mounting plate.
207
2106778-002
12.3.12 Detaching the Base unit

Disassemble first:
e. 12.4.1. Detaching the Front Unit Assembly
f. 12.4.2. Detaching the LCD Display Unit
1. Disconnect from the CPU board:

- the Sync cable
- the Loudspeaker cable
2. Disconnect from the DC/DC Board:
- the Battery cable
DCDC
CPU
3. Remove the five T10 screws with washer

insulators mounting the Base Unit to the
mid-frame. [Torque 0.8 Nm]
4. Remove the two T10 screws with washer

insulators mounting the Base Unit to the
mid-frame. [Torque 0.8 Nm]
208
2106778-002
5. Detach the mid-frame from the Base Unit by

lifting it up carefully.
NOTE: Pay attention to the cables when

reassembling. Check that they go through the
right holes in the mid-frame when attaching the
Base Unit. Be especially careful to check the
loudspeaker cable (see the figure).
6. To replace the mid-frame, detach:

- 12.3.8 DC/DC
- CPU
DC/DC
CPU Board
Board
209
2106778-002
12.4 Front Unit Assembly

12.4.1 Detaching the Front Unit Assembly
Disassemble first:
a. 12.3.3. Detaching the Frame Side Housing Decorations
b. 12.3.4. Detaching the Top Cover
1. Remove the T10 screw at the bottom of the

frame. [Torque 0.6 Nm]
210
2106778-002
2. Remove the four T10 screws in the top and

bottom corners behind the Display Unit.
[Torque 0.6 Nm]
3. Release the two snaps, one on each side of
the monitor. The snaps are located in the
snaps middle behind the Right and Left Housing
Decorations.
4. Detach the WLAN card from the CPU if
installed.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the antenna
cables.
5. Detach the Front Unit Assembly.
6. Disconnect the U/I cable from the User

Interface Board.

NOTE: Do not leave any dust or dirt between the LCD Display and the plastic display cover, or the picture
quality might deteriorate.
NOTE: Center align the user interface cable carefully to the connector in the CPU board and/or User Interface
Board.
211
2106778-002
12.4.2 Detaching the LCD Display Unit

Disassemble first:
c. 12.4.1. Detaching the Front Unit Assembly
1. Remove the four T10 screws with washers,

two on both sides of the LCD Display and
detach the display from the frame. [Torque 0.6
Nm]
2. Detach the LVDS cable from the LCD display.

3. Detach the Backlight cable from the LCD
display.
NOTE: The LCD Display Unit FRU includes the

display cable and the backlight cable. Preferably
use the original display and backlight cables if
they seem to be visually undamaged. In case you
need to replace the display cable or backlight
cable, you need to additionally detach the rear
unit assembly to be able to detach the display
cable from the CPU board, or backlight cable
from the DC/DC board.
212
2106778-002

NOTE: Do not leave any dust or dirt between the LCD Display and the plastic display cover, or the picture
quality might deteriorate.
NOTE: Dispose of the display according to local, state or country laws.
12.4.3 Replacing the Trim Knob and Trim Knob Encoder

Disassemble first:
To replace the Trim Knob:

1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to remove
the Trim Knob.
2. Detach the nut and washer from the front side
using the 11 mm wrench. [1.6 Nm]
3. Detach the Trim Knob Encoder Cable from the
User Interface Board.
4. Detach the encoder and grounding plate from
the back of the Front Unit.

NOTE: When reassembling, position the encoder and grounding plate as shown above.
213
2106778-002
12.4.4 Replacing the Front Unit Assembly FRU

Disassemble first:
d. 12.4.3. Replacing the Trim Knob and Trim Knob Encoder
1. If WLAN is installed. Detach carefully the

WLAN antennas from the Front Unit.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the antenna boards
or damage the antenna cables.
214
2106778-002

NOTE: The antennas are attached to the Front
Unit with double-sided tape. New tape is included
in the Front Unit Assembly FRU. Use this tape
when reattaching the antenna boards to the
Front Unit.
NOTE: Place the antenna cables carefully as
shown in the pictures on 12.4.5.
1. If WLAN is installed. Detach carefully the

WLAN antennas from the Front Unit.

NOTE: The antennas are attached to the Front
Unit with double-sided tape. New tape is included
in the Front Unit Assembly FRU. Use this tape
when reattaching the antenna boards to the
Front Unit.
shown in the pictures on 12.4.5.
215
2106778-002
12.4.5 Replacing the WLAN Assembly FRU

Disassemble first:
a. 12.3.4. Detaching the Top Cover
1. Attach the WLAN card to the CPU board card

slot as shown in the picture.
2. Peel off the paper release liner from the

antenna board mounting tape one at a time
(see steps 3 and 4 below).
NOTE: Be careful not to peel off the thin adhesive
layer, too.
3. Make sure the contact area for the antenna

board adhesive in the Front Unit Assembly is
clean and free of grease. Attach the antenna
board with the longer black antenna cable to
left side of the Front Unit Assembly as shown
in the picture. Make sure the antenna board is
firmly attached to the Front Unit Assembly.
Align the loop in the antenna cable carefully
between the display and the aluminum
Mid-Frame as shown in the picture. 
The orientation of the antenna cable is
important to ensure reliable wireless
communication.
4. Make sure the contact area for the antenna
board adhesive in the Front Unit Assembly is
clean and free of grease. 
Attach the antenna board with the shorter
grey antenna cable to right side of the Front
Unit Assembly as shown in the picture. 
Make sure the antenna board is firmly
attached to the Front Unit Assembly. 
Align the loop in the antenna cable carefully
between the display and the aluminum
Mid-Frame as shown in the picture. 
The orientation of the antenna cable is
important to ensure reliable wireless
communication
216
2106778-002

shown in the pictures.
Reassemble the Top Cover.

Grease the rubber gasket of Top Cover to
reassemble it smoothly.
217
2106778-002
For your notes:
218
2106778-002
Service parts
13 Service parts
NOTE: Perform the checkout procedure steps described in chapter 10. Maintenance and
checkout after you have replaced any service parts.
13.1 Ordering parts

To order parts, contact GE. Contact information is available at www.gehealthcare.com. Make
sure you have all necessary information at hand.
13.2 List of FRUs

# FRU/Item part FRU/Item description FRU content
number
1 M1133991 FRU, Recorder Unit, B650 - Includes GSI thermal printer, recorder interface
board, aluminum EMC shield and 4 mounting
screws
2 M1133992 FRU, E-Module Interface Board, B650 - Includes E-module interface board with 6
mounting screws
3 M1133993 FRU, PDM Docking Mechanism, B650 - Complete PDM docking mechanism
4 M1133994 FRU, Module Frame Cover Unit Set, B650 - Includes 4 different module frame front covers,
module frame cover unit and module frame
back plate with its mounting screw
5 M1133995 FRU, Module Frame Assembly, B650 - Includes module frame assembly with module
frame flex board and grounding plate
6 2077328-001 FRU, Standard Interface Board, B650 - Includes standard interface board (2 USB, 1 RJ-
VER02 45 & 1 DVI-I), related cover plate with labeling
and 6 mounting screws
7 2077329-001 FRU, Advanced Interface Board, B650 - Includes advanced interface board (4 USB, 4
VER02 RJ-45, DVI-I, ePort & Remote On) , related cover
plate with labeling and 6 mounting screws
8 2104122-001 FRU, AC/DC Power Supply Unit, B650 - AC/DC power supply without mounting plate,
VER02 SQC the DC/DC cable and 4 mounting screws
9 2104124-001 FRU, AC/DC Mounting Plate, B650 VER02 - Mounting plate for AC/DC power supply and 8
mounting screws
10 M1168221 FRU, Mains Fuses (10 pcs), B650 - FUSE, 4A, T, 250V, 5x20mm, high breaking
capacity 1500A, IEC, UL/CSA, CCC
11 2104123-001 FRU, Rear Unit Assembly, B650 VER02 - Complete rear unit assembly with handle unit
SQC and module frame mounting wall, hinges and
release mechanism. Includes also AC inlet with
fuses and wiring to AC/DC power supply unit,
equipotential connector, cable clamp for power
cord and mounting screws.
- Excludes the plastic part that has device plate
and other labeling
219
2106778-002

number
12 2107470-001 FRU, Front Unit Assy for Touchscreen - Includes front unit assembly with touchscreen
model, B650 VER02 sensor, User interface board, alarm lens, board
& cable, and buzzer unit.
- Excludes trim knob and trim knob encoder
(2107467-001).
13 2107467-001 FRU, Trim Knob and Trim Knob Encoder, - Includes the gray trim knob, trim knob encoder
B650 VER02 w. cable, grounding plate, and mounting part
(nut and washer)
14 2073131-001 FRU, LCD Display Unit, B650 VER02 Includes:
- LCD display with LED backlight unit and 4
mounting screws
- Backlight cable
- Display (LVDS) cable
15 M1168229 FRU, WLAN Assembly, B650 - Includes radio card with antenna cables,
antenna boards and mounting tapes
16 M1168230 FRU, DC/DC Board for Battery Model, - Includes DC/DC board for battery models with
B650 mounting screws. No cables.
17 M1168232 FRU, DC/DC Board for Models w/o - Includes DC/DC board for non-battery models
Battery, B650 with mounting screws. No cables.
18 2073134-001 FRU, CPU Board w/o uDOM, B650 VER02 - Includes CPU timekeeper battery (CR-1632) and
9 mounting screws.
- Excludes the USB Disk on Module (uDOM) with
software and all cables.
19 M1168350 FRU, CPU Timekeeper Battery (5 pcs), - CR-1632 lithium battery
B650
20 M1168312 FRU, Base Unit for Battery Model, B650 - Includes base unit for battery model, battery
door, battery board, battery cable, speaker
unit, sync board unit and GCX mounting plate
21 M1168336 FRU, Base Unit for Models w/o Battery, - Includes base unit for non-battery model,
B650 speaker unit, sync board unit and GCX
mounting plate
22 2073135-001 FRU, Mid-Frame Assembly, B650 VER02 - The mid-frame assembly includes the 4
mounting brackets for the LCD display and the
7 mounting screws and insulator plates to
mount it to the bottom unit
23 M1168356 FRU, Battery, B650 Model: Flex-3S3P rechargeable lithium-ion battery
220
2106778-002
Service parts

number
24 2067859-001 FRU, Cable Kit, B650 VER02 Includes the following parts:
- Hinge flex board with ferrites
- Display (LVDS) cable with ferrites
- Backlight cable
- User interface cable
- DC/DC cable
- Speaker unit
- Sync board unit
- battery board & cable
25 M1168340 FRU, Plastics Kit, B650 Includes the following plastic parts:
- Module frame back plate
- Right frame housing decoration
- Left frame housing decoration
- Top cover
- Alarm lens
- Battery door unit
- Cable clamp for power cord (w. spring)
- Cover plate for advanced interface board
- Cover plate for standard interface board
26 M1168341 FRU, Hardware Kit, B650 - The hardware kit includes a complete set of
fastening parts (screws, nuts, washers & plastic
PCB mounting parts) and the display mounting
brackets.
221
2106778-002
For your notes:
222
2106778-002
Installation check form
APPENDIX A: Installation check form

Customer Monitor type B650- S/N
Service record # Software version
Service engineer
Other devices connected to the monitor system

Device Serial number Device Serial number
Prior to testing verify all equipment is calibrated via “Cal” labeling and record Cal Due Dates
Measuring equipment / test gases used:

Equipment / tool / gas: Manufacturer: Model/Type/Part No: Serial Number/ID: Cal Due Date:
PASS = Test passed N.A. = Test not applicable FAIL = Test failed
Visual inspection Observed result PASS FAIL

The monitor and the connected peripheral devices are undamaged.
The monitor and the connected peripheral devices are properly
mounted with specified mounting solutions.
The cables between the patient monitor and the connected devices
are intact, properly connected and secured to the right connectors.
The modules are properly connected and locked.
The pivoting module frame and battery door are properly locked.
Electrical safety tests

Date of manufacture of the device:
Is there less than 12 months since the device was manufactured?
A - 1 (4)
2106778-002
Yes: Yes: you do not have to perform the electrical safety tests. To continue the
installation check, mark the electrical safety test completion N.A. and proceed
to Functional check. If available, attach the original electrical safety test
results to this check form.
No: No: continue to perform the electrical safety tests.
Power outlet is correctly wired.
Power cord and plug are undamaged and all conductors are properly connected.
Ground integrity check Observed result Acceptance
PASS N.A. FAIL
criteria
a.) Ground continuity test without power cord  0.1 ohms
with power cord  0.2 ohms
b.) Impedance of protective earth without power cord  0.1 ohms

connection
Ground leakage current test

Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Normal  500 µA EN /IEC
300 µA UL
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Polarity: Normal  1 mA
Polarity: Reversed  1 mA
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reversed  500 µA EN /IEC

300 µA UL
Testing touch current
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Normal 100 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Ground closed  500 µA EN /IEC

Polarity: Normal  300 µA UL
Ground open  500 µA EN /IEC
Polarity: Reversed  300 µA UL
Ground closed  500 µA EN /IEC
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reversed 100 µA
Module type: S/N Observed result Acceptance

criteria PASS N.A. FAIL
ECG SpO2/
InvP
Patient (source) leakage current tests, using a test body
A - 2 (4)
2106778-002
Installation check form
Module type: S/N Observed result Acceptance

criteria PASS N.A. FAIL
ECG SpO2/
InvP
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Ground closed (normal)  50 µA
Ground open (normal)  50 µA
Ground closed (reverse)  50 µA
Ground open (reverse)  50 µA
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reverse 10 µA
Patient (sink) leakage current tests Polarity: Normal 50µA
Polarity: Reverse 50µA
Module type S/N Observed result Acceptance PASS N.A. FAIL

criteria
Patient (source) leakage current tests, using a test body
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: NORMAL 10 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Ground closed (normal)  50 µA
Ground open (normal)  50 µA
Ground closed (reverse)  50 µA
Ground open (reverse)  50 µA
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reverse 10 µA
Patient (sink) leakage current tests Polarity: NORMAL 50µA
Polarity: Reverse 50µA
Electrical Safety Test completion
Functional check Observed result Acceptance criteria PASS N.A. FAIL

Start-up Monitor starts up normally.
Display: Picture quality Text is readable, images are clear and
brightness is good.
Display: Touchscreen control Touchscreen is correctly calibrated
and operates correctly.
Device Information Device information is correct.
Configuration Information Monitor is correctly configured.
Trim knob, secondary display, and Selected menu opens and selected
remote: Hard key activity starts.
remote: Trim Knob activity starts.
A - 3 (4)
2106778-002

Mouse Selected menu opens and selected
activity starts.
Alphanumeric keyboard Keyboard language configuration is
correct.
Barcode reader Data is correctly populated.
MC Network and S/5 Network Network symbol and other
monitor’s patient data is correctly
shown on the screen.
Wireless LAN WLAN network symbol and other
IX printers Test page is printed to the selected
printer.
InSite RSvP The patient monitor is active on InSite
RSvP back office.
Test completion
Notes
Used service parts
Signature Date
A - 4 (4)
2106778-002
Maintenance check form
APPENDIX B: Maintenance check form

Customer Monitor type B650- S/N
Service record # Software version
Service engineer Module type S/N
Planned maintenance Corrective maintenance Start date
Prior to testing verify all equipment is calibrated via “Cal” labeling and record Cal Due Dates
Measuring equipment / test gases used:
Equipment / tool / gas: Manufacturer: Model/Type/Part No: Serial Number/ID: Cal Due Date:
PASS = Test passed N.A. = Test not applicable FAIL = Test failed
Visual inspection Observed result PASS FAIL

The monitor and the connected peripheral devices are undamaged.
The monitor and the connected peripheral devices are properly mounted
with specified mounting solutions.
The cables between the patient monitor and the connected devices are
intact, properly connected and secured to the right connectors.
The modules are properly connected and locked.
The pivoting module frame and battery door are properly locked.
Electrical safety tests

Power outlet is correctly wired.
Power cord and plug are undamaged and all conductors are properly connected.
Ground integrity check Observed result Acceptance
PASS N.A. FAIL
criteria
a.) Ground continuity test without power cord  0.1 ohms
b.) Impedance of protective earth without power cord  0.1 ohms

connection
Ground leakage current test

Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Normal  500 µA EN /IEC
300 µA UL
B - 1 (4)
2106778-002
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Polarity: Normal  1 mA
Polarity: Reversed  1 mA
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reversed  500 µA EN /IEC

300 µA UL
Testing touch current
Single Fault Condition (SFC) Ground closed  500 µA EN /IEC

Ground closed  500 µA EN /IEC
Normal Condition (NC) Polarity: Reversed 100 µA
Electrical Safety Test completion

Start-up Monitor starts up normally.
Display: Picture quality Text is readable, images are clear and
brightness is good.
Display: Touchscreen control Touchscreen is correctly calibrated
and operates correctly.
PSM / PDM identification Hemodynamic parameter data
appears on the screen correctly.
E-module identification E-module parameter data appears on
the screen correctly.
remote: Hard key activity starts.
remote: Trim Knob activity starts.
Mouse Selected menu opens and selected
activity starts.
Alphanumeric keyboard Keyboard language configuration is
correct.
Barcode reader Data is correctly populated.
MC Network and S/5 Network Network symbol and other monitor’s
patient data is correctly shown on the
screen.
Wireless LAN WLAN network symbol and other
B - 2 (4)
2106778-002
Maintenance check form

IX printers Test page is printed to the selected
printer.
InSite RSvP The patient monitor is active on InSite
RSvP back office.
Recorder The header line contains the correct
information. The grid is clear. The
waveforms labels appear in the
printout as configured.
Synchronization connector test ECG, Arterial BP, and Marker Out
signals are correct.
Test completion
Notes
Used service parts
Signature Date
B - 3 (4)
2106778-002
For your notes:
B - 4 (4)
2106778-002
APPENDIX C: Verification procedure for wireless

MC Network infrastructure
Purpose and scope
The purpose of this verification procedure is to test the operation of the wireless network
infrastructure with a wireless CARESCAPE monitor, the transport monitor.
To verify the operation, you move the transport monitor throughout the predetermined
wireless coverage area and observe that a constant ECG waveform from a stationary wired
patient monitor is displayed in the bed-to-bed view of the wireless CARESCAPE monitor during
the transport.
Due to the dynamic nature of a wireless environment this test provides only a snapshot of the
wireless network at the time of performing the test. This is not a comprehensive test that
covers all possible use situations, network traffic situations, radio frequency interferences or
takes into account possible other changes in the wireless environment.
Test equipment and documentation needed

Ensure that you have the following equipment and documentation available.
CARESCAPE Central Station (CSCS):
• CSCS with full disclosure license.
NOTE: CSCS with full disclosure license is optional. It is needed for documentation and reporting
purposes only. It enables you to view afterwards potential network connectivity issues between
the transport monitor and the wireless MC Network, and to print reports about waveform loss
situations.
Wired CARESCAPE monitor, the stationary monitor:
• A CARESCAPE monitor with wired MC Network connection.
• A PDM or PSM module.
• A compatible 5-lead ECG trunk cable and 5-leadwire set.
• A patient simulator.
NOTE: You can alternatively use compatible Dash, Solar or S/5 monitor as a stationary monitor.
Check the patient monitor’s supplemental information manual for software compatibility.
Wireless CARESCAPE monitor, the transport monitor:
• CARESCAPE monitor with wireless MC Network connection.
• A PDM or PSM module. *)
• A compatible 5-lead ECG trunk cable and 5-leadwire set. *)
• A battery operated patient simulator. *)
• Service PC (laptop) with a crossover Ethernet cable.
• A plastic roll cart for the patient monitor, service PC and the simulator. To avoid RF
impairment, do not use metal roll carts.
NOTE: *) The PDM/PSM module, ECG cables and the patient simulator for the wireless
CARESCAPE monitor are needed only, if a CSCS with full disclosure license is available in the MC
Network.
C- 1 (6)
2106778-002
Documentation about the Wireless LAN infrastructure:

• GE WLAN pre-quote questionnaire with all applicable attachments.
• Wireless LAN design documentation, including site survey results.
Test plan
Each wireless installation is unique. As it is often impractical and uneconomical to verify the
whole wireless coverage area and all the installed access points, prepare a site specific test
plan that covers the areas that are most likely to encounter issues with the wireless
communication.
Utilize the information provided in the pre-quote questionnaire, existing design documentation
and site survey results, and discuss with the hospital IT specialists and clinical staff to identify
the areas that are the riskiest for poor wireless communication, and prepare a test plan
accordingly.
Take into account the following aspects when preparing a test plan.
• Identify areas with known or obvious low signal strength.
• Identify areas with known sources of radio frequency interference, causing high noise
floor and/or poor signal-to-noise ratio.
• Identify the special characteristics in the building layout (floors, wings patient rooms) and
construction material used.
• Identify the time and areas of congestion, with high number of wireless clients and a lot of
network traffic.
• Identify intended clinical workflow paths, including bedside locations and transport
routes.
Prepare the test plan by documenting the intended walking path and test points to the floor
plan, preferably to copy of a site survey document that shows the wireless coverage area, the
location of wireless access points, signal strengths and sources of known radio frequency
interferences.
NOTE: In the sample floor plan below, EG1- EG20 represent possible test points. Take into
account in your plan that some rooms and areas may not be accessible at the time of
performing the survey.
C - 2 (6)
2106778-002
Test setup
The patient monitors and the CARESCAPE Central Station shall be installed, configured and
tested to operate in the same MC Network.
CARESCAPE Central Station (CSCS):

• Configure the CSCS to capture full disclosure data from the wireless CARESCAPE monitor.
Refer to CARESCAPE Central Station (CSCS) Service Manual and CARESCAPE Central
Station (CSCS) Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
Wired CARESCAPE monitor, the stationary monitor
Setting up the connections:
1. Connect a PDM or PSM module to the patient monitor.
2. Connect the ECG cables to the module and to the patient simulator.
3. Turn on the patient monitor and the patient simulator.
Configuring the patient simulator:

4. Configure the patient simulator to output ECG waveform with:
 ECG rhythm: a normal sinus rhythm
 Heart rate: 80 bpm
 Amplitude: 1 mV
Configuring the patient monitor:

5. Select ECG1, ECG2 and ECG3 waveform fields to the screen with adequate priority.
6. In the Parameter Setup > ECG > Setup, select:
 ECG1 lead: II
 ECG2 lead: V1
 ECG3 lead: aVL.
7. Start a patient case / admit a patient in Data & Pages > Admit/Discharge menu.
Wireless CARESCAPE monitor, the transport monitor

NOTE: The PDM/PSM module, ECG cables and the patient simulator for the wireless CARESCAPE
monitor are needed only, if a CSCS with full disclosure license is available in the MC Network. If
CSCS with full disclosure license is not available, skip steps 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8.
NOTE: Ensure that the patient monitor battery, the service PC battery and the patient simulator
battery are fully charged.
Setting up the connections:

1. Set up the CARESCAPE monitor and the service PC on a roll cart.
2. Connect a PDM or PSM module to the patient monitor.
3. Connect the ECG cables to the module and to the patient simulator.
4. Connect the service PC to the patient monitor IX port using the Ethernet crossover cable.
5. Turn on the patient monitor, the service PC and the patient simulator.
C- 3 (6)
2106778-002
Configuring the patient simulator:

6. Configure the patient simulator to output ECG waveform with:
 ECG rhythm: a normal sinus rhythm
 Heart rate: 80 bpm
 Amplitude: 1 mV
Configuring the patient monitor:

7. Configure the ECG1, ECG2 and ECG3 waveform fields to the monitor screen with
adequate priority.
8. In the Parameter Setup > ECG > Setup, select:
 ECG1 lead: II
 ECG2 lead: V1
 ECG3 lead: aVL.
9. Start a patient case / admit a patient in Data & Pages > Admit/Discharge menu.
10. Select Data & Pages > Other Patients. Select the unit and bed name of the stationary
monitor and then select View.
Configuring the service PC:

11. Login to Webmin.
12. Select Diagnostics > WLAN.
NOTE: The WLAN information shown in Webmin Diagnostics page is static. Press F5 to refresh
the web browser and to see up-to-date WLAN diagnostics data.
Test execution
Execute the test procedure according to the test plan. Contact the nursing staff to ensure
access to the needed areas before starting the test.
1. Move the roll cart to the starting point of the planned test route.
2. Stop at each test point and perform the following tasks:
a. On the transport monitor:
• Verify that ECG waveforms from the remote, stationary patient monitor display in
the bed-to-bed view without any losses.
b. On the service PC: Refresh Webmin view by selecting F5 and:
• Identify the Access Point the patient monitor is connected to.
• Verify that the Signal level (RSSI) in dBm is greater than or equal to -60 dBm.
• Verify that the Transmit Rate in Mbps is greater than or equal to 5.5 Mbps.
c. Mark the network time, RSSI and Transmit Rate to the test form.
d. If there is a waveform loss situation or the RSSI or the Transmit Rate is lower than
specified:
• Observe the length of the waveform loss and, if possible, potential cause of it, for
example roaming or out of range situations.
C - 4 (6)
2106778-002
• Take a snapshot of the refreshed WLAN Diagnostics screen, for example, by printing
it to a file.
3. Move the roll cart to the following test point along the walking path and repeat the step 2
at each test point until you have completed the test plan. While moving the roll cart from
one test point to another, at all times, verify that there are no losses in the ECG
waveforms. 
NOTE: A momentary, up to 5 seconds waveform loss is normal during roaming. If longer,
or repeating waveform losses occur between test points, make this an extra test point
and report it the same way as observations in step 2.
Summary and Reporting

Include the following documents to the test results:
1. Print the full disclosure reports from the CSCS about the observed waveform loss
situations.
2. Print the snapshots of the WLAN diagnostics screens that you saved into the service PC.
3. Mark to the printouts the id of the test point.
Review and evaluate the test results together with GE personnel and the hospital IT specialists.
Summarize, if additional testing is needed and/or if the WLAN infrastructure needs to be
changed.
C- 5 (6)
2106778-002
Test Form
Observations
Test point # Time (hh:mm:ss) RSSI (dBm) Transmit rate (Mbps) Observations
Test summary and recommended actions
Date & time of testing Signature
C - 6 (6)
2106778-002
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki
FINLAND
Tel: +358 10 39411
www.gehealthcare.com
www.gehealthcare.com

Remove PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Remove PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Remove PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the intended use and audience of the manual?

What is the intended use and audience of the manual?

What safety information is included in the manual?

What safety information is included in the manual?

GE Healthcare

CARESCAPE Monitor B650

All specifications subject to change without notice.

© 2018 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.

1 About this manual 1

3.7 Equipment symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4 Using Webmin service interface 39

7.2 Configuring the network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

7.19.1 Transferring the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8 Installation checkout 107

9 Theory of operation 123

10 Maintenance and checkout 135

10.3.5 Keypad and remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

12 Disassembly and reassembly 183

12.1.4 Before disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

13 Service parts 219

Appendix A: Installation check form A-1

1 About this manual

Chapters 1 to 7 provide an overview of the CARESCAPE Monitor B650 patient monitoring

1.2 Intended audience of the manual

1.3 Conventions used in this manual

1.3.1 Product naming conventions

Menu naming varies within software packages:

1.4 Illustrations and names

1.5 Ordering manuals

1.6 Related documents

 iCollect user’s manual

1.7.1 Third party trademarks

1.8 Responsibility of the manufacturer

1.9 Product availability

For your notes:

2.2 Safety message signal words

2.3 Safety symbols

General warning sign. ISO 7010.

Follow instructions for use. ISO 7010.

Consult operating instructions. / Operating instructions.

DANGER - Shock hazard. Dangerous voltage. To reduce the risk of electric

Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation. Interference may occur in the

Type BF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated (floating)

Type BF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

Type CF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated (floating)

Type CF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

For your notes:

3.2 System components

3.2.3 Input devices

3.2.4 Acquisition modules

3.2.5 CARESCAPE Network MC or S/5 Network

3.2.6 CARESCAPE Network IX

3.2.7 Unity Network ID connectivity device

3.2.8 Secondary display

3.2.9 Printers and recorders

3.2.10 Service Interface

Local access to Webmin

Remote access to Webmin

3.3 Controls and connectors